Zyxel P-660R-61 User's Guide


Add to my manuals
297 Pages

advertisement

Zyxel P-660R-61 User's Guide | Manualzz

Prestige 660R

ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

User's Guide

Version 3.40

April

2004

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Copyright

Copyright © 2004 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.

The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.

Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.

Disclaimer

ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others.

ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.

Trademarks

ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc.

Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) Interference Statement

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference.

This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

2. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

3. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

4. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Notice 1

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Certifications

to

2. Select your product from the drop-down list box on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page.

3. Select the certification you wish to view from this page

FCC Statement iii

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

ZyXEL Limited Warranty

ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product is modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.

Note

Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind of character to the purchaser.

To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return Material

Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address,

Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country.

Safety Warnings

1. To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telephone wire.

2. Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.

3. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightening.

iv ZyXEL Warranty

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Customer Support

Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support.

Product model and serial number.

Warranty Information.

Date that you received your device.

Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.

METHOD SUPPORT E-MAIL TELEPHONE

1

LOCATION

SALES E-MAIL FAX

1

SITE

REGULAR MAIL

WORLDWIDE [email protected] +886-3-578-3942 www.zyxel.com

www.europe.zyxel.com

[email protected]

+886-3-578-2439 ftp.zyxel.com

ftp.europe.zyxel.com

ZyXEL Communications Corp.

6 Innovation Road II

Science Park

Hsinchu 300

Taiwan

NORTH

AMERICA

GERMANY

FRANCE

SPAIN

DENMARK

NORWAY [email protected]

+1-800-255-4101

+1

-

714

-

632-0882 www.us.zyxel.com

[email protected]

+1-714-632-0858 ftp.us.zyxel.com

[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected]

[email protected]

[email protected]

[email protected]

[email protected]

[email protected]

+49-2405-6909-0

+49-2405-6909-99

+33 (0)4 72 52 97 97

+33 (0)4 72 52 19 20

+34 902 195 420

+34 913 005 345

+45 39 55 07 00

+45 39 55 07 07

+47 22 80 61 80

+47 22 80 61 81 www.zyxel.de www.zyxel.fr www.zyxel.es

www.zyxel.dk

www.zyxel.no

ZyXEL Communications Inc.

1130 N. Miller St.

Anaheim

CA 92806-2001

U.S.A.

ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH.

Adenauerstr. 20/A2 D-52146

Wuerselen

Germany

ZyXEL France

1 rue des Vergers

Bat. 1 / C

69760 Limonest

France

ZyXEL Communications

Alejandro Villegas 33

1º, 28043 Madrid

Spain

ZyXEL Communications A/S

Columbusvej 5

2860 Soeborg

Denmark

ZyXEL Communications A/S

Nils Hansens vei 13

0667 Oslo

Norway

1

“+” is the (prefix) number you enter to make an international telephone call.

Customer Support v

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

METHOD

LOCATION

SWEDEN

FINLAND

SUPPORT E-MAIL

SALES E-MAIL

TELEPHONE

1

FAX

1 [email protected]

[email protected]

+46 31 744 7700

+46 31 744 7701 www.zyxel.se

[email protected]

+358-9-4780-8411 [email protected] +358-9-4780 8448

REGULAR MAIL

ZyXEL Communications A/S

Sjöporten 4, 41764 Göteborg

Sweden

ZyXEL Communications Oy

Malminkaari 10

00700 Helsinki

Finland vi Customer Support

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table of Contents

Copyright.........................................................................................................................................................ii

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement.....................................................iii

ZyXEL Limited Warranty.............................................................................................................................iv

Customer Support...........................................................................................................................................v

List of Figures................................................................................................................................................xii

List of Tables.................................................................................................................................................xvi

List of Charts..............................................................................................................................................xviii

Preface...........................................................................................................................................................xix

Introduction to DSL....................................................................................................................................xxii

Getting Started ................................................................................................................................................ I

Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige.................................................................................................1-1

1.1

Introducing the Prestige .............................................................................................................1-1

1.2

Features of the Prestige ..............................................................................................................1-2

1.3

Applications for the Prestige ......................................................................................................1-5

Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator...........................................................................................2-1

2.1

Web Configurator Overview......................................................................................................2-1

2.2

Accessing the Prestige Web Configurator..................................................................................2-1

2.3

Resetting the Prestige.................................................................................................................2-2

2.4

Navigating the Prestige Web Configurator ................................................................................2-2

Chapter 3 Wizard Setup ..............................................................................................................................3-1

3.1

Wizard Setup Introduction .........................................................................................................3-1

3.2

Encapsulation .............................................................................................................................3-1

3.3

Multiplexing...............................................................................................................................3-2

3.4

VPI and VCI...............................................................................................................................3-2

3.5

Wizard Setup Configuration: First Screen .................................................................................3-2

3.6

IP Address and Subnet Mask .....................................................................................................3-4

3.7

IP Address Assignment ..............................................................................................................3-4

3.8

Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) .....................................................................................................3-6

3.9

NAT ...........................................................................................................................................3-6

3.10

Wizard Setup Configuration: Second Screen .............................................................................3-6

3.11

DHCP Setup.............................................................................................................................3-11

3.12

Wizard Setup Configuration: Third Screen..............................................................................3-12

3.13

Wizard Setup Configuration: Connection Tests.......................................................................3-14

3.14

Test Your Internet Connection.................................................................................................3-15

Password, LAN and WAN .............................................................................................................................II

Chapter 4 Password Setup ..........................................................................................................................4-1

4.1

Password Overview....................................................................................................................4-1

4.2

Configuring Password................................................................................................................4-1

Table of Contents vii

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 5 LAN Setup ..................................................................................................................................5-1

5.1

LAN Overview ..........................................................................................................................5-1

5.2

DNS Server Address..................................................................................................................5-1

5.3

DNS Server Address Assignment ..............................................................................................5-2

5.4

LAN TCP/IP ..............................................................................................................................5-2

5.5

Configuring LAN.......................................................................................................................5-4

Chapter 6 WAN Setup .................................................................................................................................6-1

6.1

WAN Overview .........................................................................................................................6-1

6.2

Metric.........................................................................................................................................6-1

6.3

PPPoE Encapsulation.................................................................................................................6-1

6.4

Traffic Shaping ..........................................................................................................................6-2

6.5

Configuring WAN Setup ...........................................................................................................6-3

6.6

Traffic Redirect..........................................................................................................................6-7

6.7

Configuring WAN Backup ........................................................................................................6-8

NAT, Dynamic DNS and Time and Date.....................................................................................................III

Chapter 7 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens..........................................................................7-1

7.1

NAT Overview ..........................................................................................................................7-1

7.2

SUA (Single User Account) Versus NAT .................................................................................7-4

7.3

SUA Server................................................................................................................................7-5

7.4

Selecting the NAT Mode ...........................................................................................................7-6

7.5

Configuring SUA Server............................................................................................................7-7

7.6

Configuring Address Mapping...................................................................................................7-9

7.7

Editing an Address Mapping Rule ...........................................................................................7-11

Chapter 8 Dynamic DNS Setup ..................................................................................................................8-1

8.1

Dynamic DNS............................................................................................................................8-1

8.2

Configuring Dynamic DNS .......................................................................................................8-1

Chapter 9 Time and Date ............................................................................................................................9-1

9.1

Configuring Time and Date .......................................................................................................9-1

Remote Management and UPnP..................................................................................................................IV

Chapter 10 Remote Management Configuration....................................................................................10-1

10.1

Remote Management Overview...............................................................................................10-1

10.2

Telnet .......................................................................................................................................10-2

10.3

FTP ..........................................................................................................................................10-2

10.4

Web..........................................................................................................................................10-2

10.5

Configuring Remote Management...........................................................................................10-3

Chapter 11 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) .......................................................................................... 11-1

11.1

Introducing Universal Plug and Play .......................................................................................11-1

11.2

UPnP and ZyXEL ....................................................................................................................11-2

11.3

Installing UPnP in Windows Example.....................................................................................11-3

11.4

Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ....................................................................................11-5

Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................... V

viii Table of Contents

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 12 Maintenance ...........................................................................................................................12-1

12.1

Maintenance Overview ............................................................................................................12-1

12.2

System Status Screen ...............................................................................................................12-1

12.3

DHCP Table Screen .................................................................................................................12-6

12.4

Diagnostic Screens ...................................................................................................................12-7

12.5

Firmware Screen ......................................................................................................................12-9

SMT General Configuration ....................................................................................................................... VI

Chapter 13 Introducing the SMT .............................................................................................................13-1

13.1

SMT Introduction.....................................................................................................................13-1

13.2

Navigating the SMT Interface..................................................................................................13-3

13.3

Changing the System Password ...............................................................................................13-5

Chapter 14 Menu 1 General Setup ...........................................................................................................14-1

14.1

General Setup...........................................................................................................................14-1

14.2

Procedure To Configure Menu 1..............................................................................................14-1

Chapter 15 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup..................................................................................................15-1

15.1

Introduction to WAN Backup Setup ........................................................................................15-1

15.2

Configuring Dial Backup in Menu 2........................................................................................15-1

Chapter 16 Menu 3 LAN Setup ................................................................................................................16-1

16.1

LAN Setup ...............................................................................................................................16-1

16.2

Protocol Dependent Ethernet Setup .........................................................................................16-2

16.3

TCP/IP Ethernet Setup and DHCP...........................................................................................16-2

Chapter 17 Internet Access .......................................................................................................................17-1

17.1

Internet Access Overview ........................................................................................................17-1

17.2

IP Policies ................................................................................................................................17-1

17.3

IP Alias.....................................................................................................................................17-1

17.4

IP Alias Setup...........................................................................................................................17-2

17.5

Route IP Setup..........................................................................................................................17-4

17.6

Internet Access Configuration..................................................................................................17-4

Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration..................................................................................................18-1

18.1

Remote Node Setup Overview.................................................................................................18-1

18.2

Remote Node Setup..................................................................................................................18-1

18.3

Remote Node Network Layer Options.....................................................................................18-6

18.4

Remote Node Filter ..................................................................................................................18-8

18.5

Editing ATM Layer Options ..................................................................................................18-12

Chapter 19 Static Route Setup ..................................................................................................................19-1

19.1

IP Static Route Overview.........................................................................................................19-1

19.2

Configuration ...........................................................................................................................19-2

Chapter 20 Bridging Setup........................................................................................................................20-1

20.1

Bridging in General..................................................................................................................20-1

20.2

Bridge Ethernet Setup ..............................................................................................................20-1

Chapter 21 Network Address Translation (NAT)....................................................................................21-1

Table of Contents ix

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

21.1

Using NAT...............................................................................................................................21-1

21.2

Applying NAT .........................................................................................................................21-1

21.3

NAT Setup ...............................................................................................................................21-3

21.4

Configuring a Server behind NAT...........................................................................................21-9

21.5

General NAT Examples.........................................................................................................21-11

SMT Advanced Management..................................................................................................................... VII

Chapter 22 Filter Configuration...............................................................................................................22-1

22.1

About Filtering.........................................................................................................................22-1

22.2

Configuring a Filter Set for the Prestige ..................................................................................22-4

22.3

Filter Rules Summary Menus ..................................................................................................22-6

22.4

Configuring a Filter Rule .........................................................................................................22-7

22.5

Filter Types and NAT ............................................................................................................22-14

22.6

Example Filter........................................................................................................................22-14

22.7

Applying Filters and Factory Defaults...................................................................................22-17

Chapter 23 SNMP Configuration .............................................................................................................23-1

23.1

About SNMP............................................................................................................................23-1

23.2

Supported MIBs.......................................................................................................................23-2

23.3

SNMP Configuration ...............................................................................................................23-2

23.4

SNMP Traps ............................................................................................................................23-4

Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis.......................................................................................24-1

24.1

System Status...........................................................................................................................24-1

24.2

System Information..................................................................................................................24-3

24.3

Log and Trace ..........................................................................................................................24-5

24.4

Diagnostic ................................................................................................................................24-8

Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance .................................................................25-1

25.1

Filename Conventions .............................................................................................................25-1

25.2

Backup Configuration..............................................................................................................25-2

25.3

Restore Configuration..............................................................................................................25-6

25.4

Uploading Firmware and Configuration Files .........................................................................25-7

Chapter 26 System Maintenance..............................................................................................................26-1

26.1

Command Interpreter Mode.....................................................................................................26-1

26.2

Call Control Support................................................................................................................26-2

26.3

Time and Date Setting .............................................................................................................26-4

Chapter 27 Remote Management.............................................................................................................27-1

27.1

Remote Management Overview...............................................................................................27-1

27.2

Remote Management ...............................................................................................................27-1

27.3

Remote Management and NAT ...............................................................................................27-3

27.4

System Timeout .......................................................................................................................27-3

Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing ...................................................................................................................28-1

28.1

IP Policy Routing Overview ....................................................................................................28-1

28.2

Benefits of IP Policy Routing ..................................................................................................28-1 x Table of Contents

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

28.3

Routing Policy..........................................................................................................................28-1

28.4

IP Routing Policy Setup ...........................................................................................................28-2

28.5

Applying an IP Policy ..............................................................................................................28-5

28.6

IP Policy Routing Example ......................................................................................................28-6

Chapter 29 Call Scheduling.......................................................................................................................29-1

29.1

Introduction..............................................................................................................................29-1

Appendices and Index............................................................................................................................... VIII

Appendix A Troubleshooting......................................................................................................................A-1

Appendix B IP Subnetting..........................................................................................................................B-1

Appendix C PPPoE .....................................................................................................................................C-1

Appendix D Virtual Circuit Topology .......................................................................................................D-1

Appendix E Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address ..............................................................................E-1

Appendix F Splitters and Microfilters....................................................................................................... F-1

Appendix G Log Descriptions ................................................................................................................... G-1

Appendix H Index ...................................................................................................................................... H-1

Table of Contents xi

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

List of Figures

Figure 1-1 Prestige Internet Access Application.............................................................................................1-6

Figure 1-2 Prestige LAN-to-LAN Application ...............................................................................................1-6

Figure 2-1 Password Screen ...........................................................................................................................2-1

Figure 2-2 Web Configurator SITE MAP Screen ...........................................................................................2-3

Figure 3-1 Wizard Screen 1 ............................................................................................................................3-3

Figure 3-2 Internet Connection with PPPoE...................................................................................................3-6

Figure 3-3 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 .............................................................................................3-8

Figure 3-4 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP......................................................................................3-9

Figure 3-5 Internet Connection with PPPoA ................................................................................................3-10

Figure 3-6 Wizard Screen 3 ..........................................................................................................................3-12

Figure 3-7 Wizard : LAN Configuration.......................................................................................................3-13

Figure 3-8 Wizard Screen 4 ..........................................................................................................................3-14

Figure 4-1 Password .......................................................................................................................................4-1

Figure 5-1 LAN and WAN IP Addresses ........................................................................................................5-1

Figure 5-2 LAN ..............................................................................................................................................5-4

Figure 6-1 Example of Traffic Shaping ..........................................................................................................6-3

Figure 6-2 WAN Setup .....................................................................................................................................6-4

Figure 6-3 Traffic Redirect Example ..............................................................................................................6-8

Figure 6-4 Traffic Redirect LAN Setup ..........................................................................................................6-8

Figure 6-5 WAN Backup

..................................................................................................................................6-9

Figure 7-1 How NAT Works...........................................................................................................................7-2

Figure 7-2 NAT Application With IP Alias .....................................................................................................7-3

Figure 7-3 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example........................................................................................7-6

Figure 7-4 NAT Mode.....................................................................................................................................7-7

Figure 7-5 Edit SUA/NAT Server Set.............................................................................................................7-8

Figure 7-6 Address Mapping Rules ..............................................................................................................7-10

Figure 7-7 Address Mapping Rule Edit ........................................................................................................7-11

Figure 8-1 DDNS............................................................................................................................................8-2

Figure 9-1 Time and Date ...............................................................................................................................9-1

Figure 10-1 Telnet Configuration on a TCP/IP Network ..............................................................................10-2

Figure 10-2 Remote Management ................................................................................................................10-3

Figure 11-1 Configuring UPnP .....................................................................................................................11-2

Figure 12-1 System Status ............................................................................................................................12-2

Figure 12-2 System Status: Show Statistics..................................................................................................12-4

Figure 12-3 DHCP Table ..............................................................................................................................12-6

Figure 12-4 Diagnostic General....................................................................................................................12-7

Figure 12-5 Diagnostic DSL Line.................................................................................................................12-8

Figure 12-6 Firmware Upgrade ..................................................................................................................12-10 xii List of Figures

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 12-7 Network Temporarily Disconnected........................................................................................12-11

Figure 12-8 Error Message..........................................................................................................................12-11

Figure 13-1 Login Screen ............................................................................................................................ 13-1

Figure 13-2 Prestige 660R SMT Menu Overview ....................................................................................... 13-2

Figure 13-3 SMT Main Menu ...................................................................................................................... 13-4

Figure 13-4 Menu 23.1 Change Password ................................................................................................... 13-5

Figure 14-1 Menu 1 General Setup.............................................................................................................. 14-2

Figure 14-2 Menu 1.1 Configure Dynamic DNS ......................................................................................... 14-3

Figure 15-1 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup .................................................................................................... 15-1

Figure 15-2 Menu 2.1Traffic Redirect Setup ............................................................................................... 15-3

Figure 16-1 Menu 3 LAN Setup .................................................................................................................. 16-1

Figure 16-2 Menu 3.1 LAN Port Filter Setup .............................................................................................. 16-2

Figure 16-3 Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup ........................................................................... 16-3

Figure 17-1 Physical Network Figure 17-2 Partitioned Logical Networks ......................... 17-2

Figure 17-3 Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Setup.......................................................................................... 17-2

Figure 17-4 Menu 3.2.1 IP Alias Setup ........................................................................................................ 17-3

Figure 17-5 Menu 1 General Setup.............................................................................................................. 17-4

Figure 17-6 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup .................................................................................................. 17-5

Figure 18-1 Menu 11 Remote Node Setup................................................................................................... 18-2

Figure 18-2 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile .............................................................................................. 18-3

Figure 18-3 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options ................................................................... 18-6

Figure 18-4 Sample IP Addresses for a TCP/IP LAN-to-LAN Connection ................................................. 18-8

Figure 18-5 Menu 11.5 Remote Node Filter (RFC 1483 or ENET Encapsulation) ..................................... 18-9

Figure 18-6 Menu 11.5 Remote Node Filter (PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation).......................................... 18-9

Figure 18-7 Internet Security ..................................................................................................................... 18-10

Figure 18-8 Menu 21- Filer Set Configuration ...........................................................................................18-11

Figure 18-9 Menu 21.11- WebSet 11 ..........................................................................................................18-11

Figure 18-10 Menu 21.12- WebSet 12 ........................................................................................................18-11

Figure 18-11 Menu 11.6 for VC-based Multiplexing................................................................................. 18-12

Figure 18-12 Menu 11.6 for LLC-based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation ........................................... 18-13

Figure 18-13 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile .......................................................................................... 18-13

Figure 18-14 Menu 11.8 Advance Setup Options ...................................................................................... 18-14

Figure 19-1 Sample Static Routing Topology .............................................................................................. 19-1

Figure 19-2 Menu 12 Static Route Setup ..................................................................................................... 19-2

Figure 19-3 Menu 12.1 IP Static Route Setup.............................................................................................. 19-2

Figure 19-4 Menu12.1.1 Edit IP Static Route .............................................................................................. 19-3

Figure 20-1 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile .............................................................................................. 20-2

Figure 20-2 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options ................................................................... 20-2

Figure 20-3 Menu 12.3.1 Edit Bridge Static Route...................................................................................... 20-3

Figure 21-1 Menu 4 Applying NAT for Internet Access .............................................................................. 21-2

Figure 21-2 Menu 11.3 Applying NAT to the Remote Node ....................................................................... 21-3

List of Figures xiii

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 21-3 Menu 15 NAT Setup..................................................................................................................21-4

Figure 21-4 Menu 15.1 Address Mapping Sets.............................................................................................21-4

Figure 21-5 Menu 15.1.255 SUA Address Mapping Rules ..........................................................................21-5

Figure 21-6 Menu 15.1.1 First Set ................................................................................................................21-6

Figure 21-7 Menu 15.1.1.1 Editing/Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set...............................................21-8

Figure 21-8 Menu 15.2 NAT Server Setup ...................................................................................................21-9

Figure 21-9 Menu 15.2.1 NAT Server Setup ..............................................................................................21-10

Figure 21-10 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example................................................................................21-11

Figure 21-11 NAT Example 1.....................................................................................................................21-11

Figure 21-12 Menu 4 Internet Access & NAT Example .............................................................................21-12

Figure 21-13 NAT Example 2.....................................................................................................................21-12

Figure 21-14 Menu 15.2.1 Specifying an Inside Server .............................................................................21-13

Figure 21-15 NAT Example 3.....................................................................................................................21-14

Figure 21-16 Example 3: Menu 11.3 ..........................................................................................................21-15

Figure 21-17 Example 3: Menu 15.1.1.1 ....................................................................................................21-15

Figure 21-18 Example 3: Final Menu 15.1.1 ..............................................................................................21-16

Figure 21-19 NAT Example 4.....................................................................................................................21-17

Figure 21-20 Example 4: Menu 15.1.1.1 Address Mapping Rule...............................................................21-18

Figure 21-21 Example 4: Menu 15.1.1 Address Mapping Rules ................................................................21-18

Figure 22-1 Outgoing Packet Filtering Process ............................................................................................22-2

Figure 22-2 Filter Rule Process ....................................................................................................................22-3

Figure 22-3 Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration .............................................................................................22-4

Figure 22-4 NetBIOS_WAN Filter Rules Summary.....................................................................................22-5

Figure 22-5 NetBIOS_LAN Filter Rules Summary......................................................................................22-5

Figure 22-6 IGMP Filter Rules Summary.....................................................................................................22-5

Figure 22-7 Menu 21.x.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule................................................................................................22-8

Figure 22-8 Executing an IP Filter..............................................................................................................22-11

Figure 22-9 Menu 21.5.1 Generic Filter Rule ............................................................................................22-12

Figure 22-10 Protocol and Device Filter Sets.............................................................................................22-14

Figure 22-11 Sample Telnet Filter ..............................................................................................................22-15

Figure 22-12 Menu 21.6.1 Sample Filter....................................................................................................22-16

Figure 22-13 Menu 21.6 Sample Filter Rules Summary ............................................................................22-17

Figure 22-14 Filtering Ethernet Traffic.......................................................................................................22-18

Figure 22-15 Filtering Remote Node Traffic ..............................................................................................22-19

Figure 23-1 SNMP Management Model.......................................................................................................23-1

Figure 23-2 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration .................................................................................................23-3

Figure 24-1 Menu 24 System Maintenance ..................................................................................................24-1

Figure 24-2 Menu 24.1 System Maintenance : Status ..................................................................................24-2

Figure 24-3 Menu 24.2 System Information and Console Port Speed..........................................................24-3

Figure 24-4 Menu 24.2.1 System Maintenance : Information ......................................................................24-4

Figure 24-5 Menu 24.2.2 System Maintenance : Change Console Port Speed.............................................24-5 xiv List of Figures

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 24-6 Menu 24.3 System Maintenance : Log and Trace .................................................................... 24-5

Figure 24-7 Sample Error and Information Messages ................................................................................. 24-6

Figure 24-8 Menu 24.3.2 System Maintenance : Syslog and Accounting.................................................... 24-6

Figure 24-9 Menu 24.4 System Maintenance : Diagnostic .......................................................................... 24-9

Figure 25-1 Telnet in Menu 24.5.................................................................................................................. 25-2

Figure 25-2 FTP Session Example............................................................................................................... 25-3

Figure 25-3 Telnet into Menu 24.6............................................................................................................... 25-6

Figure 25-4 Restore Using FTP Session Example ....................................................................................... 25-7

Figure 25-5 Telnet Into Menu 24.7.1 Upload System Firmware.................................................................. 25-8

Figure 25-6 Telnet Into Menu 24.7.2 System Maintenance ......................................................................... 25-8

Figure 25-7 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload ...................................................................... 25-9

Figure 26-1 Command Mode in Menu 24.................................................................................................... 26-1

Figure 26-2 Valid Commands ...................................................................................................................... 26-2

Figure 26-3 Menu 24.9 System Maintenance : Call Control........................................................................ 26-2

Figure 26-4 Menu 24.9.1 System Maintenance : Budget Management ....................................................... 26-3

Figure 26-5 Menu 24 System Maintenance ................................................................................................. 26-4

Figure 26-6 Menu 24.10 System Maintenance: Time and Date Setting....................................................... 26-4

Figure 27-1 Menu 24.11 Remote Management Control............................................................................... 27-2

Figure 28-1 Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup ............................................................................................ 28-2

Figure 28-2 Menu 25.1 IP Routing Policy Setup ......................................................................................... 28-3

Figure 28-3 Menu 25.1.1 IP Routing Policy ................................................................................................ 28-4

Figure 28-4 Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup ........................................................................... 28-6

Figure 28-5 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options ................................................................... 28-6

Figure 28-6 Example of IP Policy Routing .................................................................................................. 28-7

Figure 28-7 IP Routing Policy Example ...................................................................................................... 28-8

Figure 28-8 IP Routing Policy Example ...................................................................................................... 28-9

Figure 28-9 Applying IP Policies Example .................................................................................................. 28-9

Figure 29-1 Menu 26 Schedule Setup .......................................................................................................... 29-1

Figure 29-2 Menu 26.1 Schedule Set Setup................................................................................................. 29-2

Figure 29-3 Applying Schedule Set(s) to a Remote Node (PPPoE)............................................................. 29-4

List of Figures xv

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

List of Tables

Table 2-1 Web Configurator Screens Summary..............................................................................................2-3

Table 3-1 Wizard Screen 1..............................................................................................................................3-3

Table 3-2 Internet Connection with PPPoE ....................................................................................................3-7

Table 3-3 Internet Connection with RFC 1483...............................................................................................3-8

Table 3-4 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP .......................................................................................3-9

Table 3-5 Internet Connection with PPPoA..................................................................................................3-11

Table 3-6 Wizard : LAN Configuration ........................................................................................................3-13

Table 4-1 Password.........................................................................................................................................4-1

Table 5-1 LAN................................................................................................................................................5-4

Table 6-1 WAN Setup

.......................................................................................................................................6-5

..................................................................................................................................610

Table 6-2 WAN Backup

Table 7-1 NAT Definitions..............................................................................................................................7-1

Table 7-2 NAT Mapping Types.......................................................................................................................7-4

Table 7-3 Services and Port Numbers.............................................................................................................7-5

Table 7-4 NAT Mode ......................................................................................................................................7-7

Table 7-5 Edit SUA/NAT Server Set ..............................................................................................................7-8

Table 7-6 Address Mapping Rules................................................................................................................7-10

Table 7-7 Address Mapping Rule Edit..........................................................................................................7-12

Table 8-1 DDNS .............................................................................................................................................8-2

Table 9-1 Time and Date.................................................................................................................................9-2

Table 10-1 Remote Management ..................................................................................................................10-3

Table 11-1 Configuring UPnP.......................................................................................................................11-2

Table 12-1 System Status..............................................................................................................................12-3

Table 12-2 System Status: Show Statistics ...................................................................................................12-5

Table 12-3 DHCP Table................................................................................................................................12-6

Table 12-4 Diagnostic General .....................................................................................................................12-8

Table 12-5 Diagnostic DSL Line ..................................................................................................................12-9

Table 12-6 Firmware Upgrade ....................................................................................................................12-10

Table 13-1 Main Menu Commands ..............................................................................................................13-3

Table 13-2 Main Menu Summary .................................................................................................................13-4

Table 14-1 Menu 1 General Setup ................................................................................................................14-2

Table 14-2 Menu 1.1 Configure Dynamic DNS ...........................................................................................14-3

Table 15-1 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup.......................................................................................................15-1

Table 15-2 Menu 2.1Traffic Redirect Setup..................................................................................................15-3

Table 16-1 DHCP Ethernet Setup .................................................................................................................16-3

Table 16-2 TCP/IP Ethernet Setup................................................................................................................16-4

Table 17-1 Menu 3.2.1 IP Alias Setup ..........................................................................................................17-3

Table 17-2 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ....................................................................................................17-5 xvi List of Tables

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 18-1 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile................................................................................................ 18-3

Table 18-2 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options..................................................................... 18-6

Table 18-3 Menu 11.8 Advance Setup Options.......................................................................................... 18-14

Table 19-1 Menu12.1.1 Edit IP Static Route................................................................................................ 19-3

Table 20-1 Remote Node Network Layer Options : Bridge Fields .............................................................. 20-3

Table 20-2 Menu 12.3.1 Edit Bridge Static Route ....................................................................................... 20-3

Table 21-1 Applying NAT in Menus 4 & 11.3 ............................................................................................. 21-3

Table 21-2 SUA Address Mapping Rules .................................................................................................... 21-5

Table 21-3 Menu 15.1.1 First Set................................................................................................................. 21-7

Table 21-4 Menu 15.1.1.1 Editing/Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set................................................ 21-8

Table 22-1 Abbreviations Used in the Filter Rules Summary Menu............................................................ 22-6

Table 22-2 Rule Abbreviations Used ........................................................................................................... 22-6

Table 22-3 Menu 21.x.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule ................................................................................................ 22-8

Table 22-4 Menu 21.5.1 Generic Filter Rule.............................................................................................. 22-13

Table 22-5 Filter Sets Table ....................................................................................................................... 22-18

Table 23-1 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration .................................................................................................. 23-3

Table 23-2 SNMP Traps............................................................................................................................... 23-4

Table 23-3 Ports and Permanent Virtual Circuits ......................................................................................... 23-4

Table 24-1 Menu 24.1 System Maintenance : Status ................................................................................... 24-2

Table 24-2 Menu 24.2.1 System Maintenance : Information ....................................................................... 24-4

Table 24-3 Menu 24.3.2 System Maintenance : Syslog and Accounting ..................................................... 24-6

Table 24-4 Menu 24.4 System Maintenance Menu : Diagnostic ................................................................. 24-9

Table 25-1 Filename Conventions................................................................................................................ 25-2

Table 25-2 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients........................................................................ 25-3

Table 25-3 General Commands for GUI-based TFTP Clients ..................................................................... 25-5

Table 26-1 Menu 24.9.1 System Maintenance : Budget Management......................................................... 26-3

Table 26-2 Menu 24.10 System Maintenance: Time and Date Setting ........................................................ 26-5

Table 27-1 Menu 24.11 Remote Management Control ................................................................................ 27-2

Table 28-1 Menu 25.1 IP Routing Policy Setup........................................................................................... 28-3

Table 28-2 Menu 25.1.1 IP Routing Policy.................................................................................................. 28-4

Table 29-1 Menu 26.1 Schedule Set Setup................................................................................................... 29-2

List of Tables xvii

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

List of Charts

Chart A-1 Troubleshooting the Start-Up of Your Prestige .............................................................................A-1

Chart A-2 Troubleshooting the LAN LED.....................................................................................................A-1

Chart A-3 Troubleshooting the DSL LED .....................................................................................................A-2

Chart A-4 Troubleshooting the LAN Interface ..............................................................................................A-2

Chart A-5 Troubleshooting the WAN Interface .............................................................................................A-2

Chart A-6 Troubleshooting Internet Access...................................................................................................A-3

Chart A-7 Troubleshooting the Password ......................................................................................................A-3

Chart A-8 Troubleshooting the Web Configurator.........................................................................................A-4

Chart A-9 Troubleshooting Remote Management .........................................................................................A-4

Chart B-1 Classes of IP Addresses................................................................................................................. B-1

Chart B-2 Allowed IP Address Range By Class ............................................................................................ B-2

Chart B-3 “Natural” Masks............................................................................................................................ B-2

Chart B-4 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ................................................................................................ B-3

Chart B-5 Subnet 1 ........................................................................................................................................ B-4

Chart B-6 Subnet 2 ........................................................................................................................................ B-4

Chart B-7 Subnet 1 ........................................................................................................................................ B-5

Chart B-8 Subnet 2 ........................................................................................................................................ B-5

Chart B-9 Subnet 3 ........................................................................................................................................ B-5

Chart B-10 Subnet 4 ...................................................................................................................................... B-6

Chart B-11 Eight Subnets .............................................................................................................................. B-6

Chart B-12 Class C Subnet Planning ............................................................................................................. B-7

Chart B-13 Class B Subnet Planning ............................................................................................................. B-7

Chart G-1 System Maintenance Logs ............................................................................................................G-1

Chart G-2 Access Logs ..................................................................................................................................G-2

Chart G-3 ICMP Notes ..................................................................................................................................G-2 xviii Lists of Charts

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Preface

Congratulations on your purchase of the Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway.

Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com

for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com

for

North American products.

Your Prestige is easy to install and configure.

Use the web configurator, System Management Terminal (SMT) or command interpreter interface to configure your ZyWALL. Not all features can be configured through all interfaces.

The web configurator parts of this guide contain background information on features configurable by the web configurator and the SMT. The SMT parts of this guide contain background information solely on features not configurable by the web configurator.

About This User's Guide

This manual is designed to guide you through the configuration of your Prestige for its various applications.

The web configurator parts of this guide contain background information on features configurable by web configurator. The SMT parts of this guide contain background information solely on features not configurable by web configurator.

Use the web configurator, System Management Terminal (SMT) or command interpreter interface to configure your Prestige. Not all features can be configured through all interfaces.

Related Documentation

Supporting Disk

Refer to the included CD for support documents.

Compact Guide

The Compact Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. They contain connection information and instructions on getting started.

Web Configurator Online Help

Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information.

ZyXEL Glossary and Web Site

Please refer to www.zyxel.com for an online glossary of networking terms and additional support documentation.

Preface xix

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

User Guide Feedback

Help us help you! E-mail all User Guide-related comments, questions or suggestions for improvement to [email protected] or send regular mail to The Technical Writing Team, ZyXEL Communications

Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park, Hsinchu, 300, Taiwan. Thank you!

Syntax Conventions

“Enter” means for you to type one or more characters. “Select” or “Choose” means for you to use one predefined choices.

The SMT menu titles and labels are in

Bold Times New Roman

font. Predefined field choices are in

Bold Arial

font. Command and arrow keys are enclosed in square brackets . [ENTER] means the

Enter, or carriage return key; [ESC] means the Escape key and [SPACE BAR] means the Space Bar.

Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma. For example, “click the Apple icon,

Control

Panels

and then

Modem

” means first click the Apple icon, then point your mouse pointer to

Control

Panels

and then click

Modem

.

For brevity’s sake, we will use “e.g.,” as a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” for “that is” or “in other words” throughout this manual.

The Prestige 660R series may be referred to as the Prestige in this user’s guide. This refers to both models (ADSL over POTS and ADSL over ISDN) unless specifically identified. xx Preface

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Graphics Icons Key

Prestige

Computer

Notebook computer

Server

DSLAM

Switch

Firewall

Router

Telephone

Wireless Signal

The following section offers some background information on DSL. Skip to

Chapter 1

if you wish to begin working with your router right away.

Preface xxi

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Introduction to DSL

DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) technology enhances the data capacity of the existing twisted-pair wire that runs between the local telephone company switching offices and most homes and offices. While the wire itself can handle higher frequencies, the telephone switching equipment is designed to cut off signals above

4,000 Hz to filter noise off the voice line, but now everybody is searching for ways to get more bandwidth to improve access to the Web - hence DSL technologies.

There are actually seven types of DSL service, ranging in speeds from 16 Kbits/sec to 52 Mbits/sec. The services are either symmetrical (traffic flows at the same speed in both directions), or asymmetrical (the downstream capacity is higher than the upstream capacity). Asymmetrical services (ADSL) are suitable for

Internet users because more information is usually downloaded than uploaded. For example, a simple button click in a web browser can start an extended download that includes graphics and text.

As data rates increase, the carrying distance decreases. That means that users who are beyond a certain distance from the telephone company’s central office may not be able to obtain the higher speeds.

A DSL connection is a point-to-point dedicated circuit, meaning that the link is always up and there is no dialing required.

Introduction to ADSL

It is an asymmetrical technology, meaning that the downstream data rate is much higher than the upstream data rate. As mentioned, this works well for a typical Internet session in which more information is downloaded, for example, from Web servers, than is uploaded. ADSL operates in a frequency range that is above the frequency range of voice services, so the two systems can operate over the same cable. xxii DSL?

Getting Started

Part I:

Getting Started

This part is structured as a step-by-step guide to help you access your Prestige. It covers key features and applications, accessing the web configurator and configuring the wizard screens for initial setup.

I

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 1

Getting To Know Your Prestige

This chapter describes the key features and applications of your Prestige

.

1.1 Introducing the Prestige

Your Prestige integrates high-speed 10/100Mbps auto-negotiating LAN interface(s) and a high-speed ADSL port into a single package. The Prestige is ideal for high-speed Internet browsing and making LAN-to-LAN connections to remote networks. The Prestige is an ADSL router compatible with the

ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ standards. Maximum data rates attainable by the Prestige for each standard are shown in the next table.

UPSTREAM DOWNSTREAM DATA RATE

STANDARD

ADSL

832 kbps 8Mbps

ADSL2

ADSL2+

3.5Mbps 12Mbps

3.5Mbps 24Mbps

The standard your ISP supports determines the maximum upstream and downstream speeds attainable. Actual speeds attained also depend on the distance from your ISP, noise, line quality, etc.

By integrating DSL and NAT, the Prestige provides ease of installation and Internet access.

Models ending in “1”, for example P660R-61, denote a device that works over the analog telephone system,

POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service). Models ending in “3” denote a device that works over ISDN

(Integrated Synchronous Digital System). Models ending in “7” denote a device that works over T-ISDN

(UR-2).

Only use firmware for your Prestige’s specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Prestige.

The web browser-based Graphical User Interface provides easy management.

Getting To Know Your Prestige 1-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

1.2 Features of the Prestige

The following sections describe the features of the Prestige.

High Speed Internet Access

Your Prestige ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ router can support downstream transmission rates of up to 24Mbps and upstream transmission rates of up to 3.5Mbps. Actual speeds attained depend on ISP DSLAM environment.

Traffic Redirect

Traffic redirect forwards WAN traffic to a backup gateway when the Prestige cannot connect to the Internet, thus acting as an auxiliary if your regular WAN connection fails.

Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)

Using the standard TCP/IP protocol, the Prestige and other UPnP enabled devices can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network.

PPPoE Support (RFC2516)

PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) emulates a dial-up connection. It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL. The PPPoE driver on the

Prestige is transparent to the computers on the LAN, which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers.

Network Address Translation (NAT)

Network Address Translation (NAT) allows the translation of an Internet protocol address used within one network (for example a private IP address used in a local network) to a different IP address known within another network (for example a public IP address used on the Internet).

10/100M Auto-negotiating Ethernet/Fast Ethernet Interface(s)

This auto-negotiation feature allows the Prestige to detect the speed of incoming transmissions and adjust appropriately without manual intervention. It allows data transfer of either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps in either half-duplex or full-duplex mode depending on your Ethernet network.

Auto-Crossover (MDI/MDI-X) 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface(s)

These interfaces automatically adjust to either a crossover or straight-through Ethernet cable.

1-2 Getting To Know Your Prestige

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Dynamic DNS Support

With Dynamic DNS support, you can have a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address, allowing the host to be more easily accessible from various locations on the Internet. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider.

Multiple PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuits) Support

Your Prestige supports up to 8 PVC’s.

ADSL Transmission Rate Standards

Full-Rate (ANSI T1.413, Issue 2; G.dmt (G.992.1) with line rate support of up to 8 Mbps downstream and 832 Kbps upstream.

G.lite (G.992.2) with line rate support of up to 1.5Mbps downstream and 512Kbps upstream.

Supports Multi-Mode standard (ANSI T1.413, Issue 2; G.dmt (G.992.1); G.lite (G992.2)).

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) network layer protocol.

ATM Forum UNI 3.1/4.0 PVC.

Supports up to 8 PVCs (UBR, CBR, VBR).

Multiple Protocol over AAL5 (RFC 1483).

PPP over AAL5 (RFC 2364).

PPP over Ethernet over AAL5 (RFC 2516).

RFC 1661.

PPP over PAP (RFC 1334).

PPP over CHAP (RFC 1994).

Protocol Support

DHCP Support

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) allows the individual clients (computers) to obtain the TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a centralized DHCP server. The Prestige has built-in

DHCP server capability enabled by default. It can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and

DNS servers to DHCP clients. The Prestige can now also act as a surrogate DHCP server (DHCP

Relay) where it relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the clients.

IP Alias

Getting To Know Your Prestige 1-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

IP Alias allows you to partition a physical network into logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network.

IP Policy Routing (IPPR)

Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the router takes the shortest path to forward a packet. IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator.

PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) link layer protocol.

Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols.

RIP I/RIP II

IGMP Proxy

ICMP support

ATM QoS support

MIB II support (RFC 1213)

Networking Compatibility

Your Prestige is compatible with the major ADSL DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer) providers, making configuration as simple as possible for you.

Multiplexing

The Prestige supports VC-based and LLC-based multiplexing.

Encapsulation

The Prestige supports PPPoA (RFC 2364 - PPP over ATM Adaptation Layer 5), RFC 1483 encapsulation over ATM, MAC encapsulated routing (ENET encapsulation) as well as PPP over Ethernet (RFC 2516).

Network Management

Menu driven SMT (System Management Terminal) management

Embedded web configurator

CLI (Command Line Interpreter)

Remote Management via Telnet or Web.

SNMP manageable

DHCP Server/Client/Relay

1-4 Getting To Know Your Prestige

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Built-in Diagnostic Tools

Syslog

Telnet Support (Password-protected telnet access to internal configuration manager)

TFTP/FTP server, firmware upgrade and configuration backup/support supported

Supports OAM F4/F5 loop-back, AIS and RDI OAM cells

Other PPPoE Features

PPPoE idle time out

PPPoE Dial on Demand

Diagnostics Capabilities

The Prestige can perform self-diagnostic tests. These tests check the integrity of the following circuitry:

FLASH memory

ADSL circuitry

RAM

LAN port

Packet Filters

The Prestige's packet filtering functions allows added network security and management.

Ease of Installation

Your Prestige is designed for quick, intuitive and easy installation.

Housing

Your Prestige's compact and ventilated housing minimizes space requirements making it easy to position anywhere in your busy office.

1.3 Applications for the Prestige

Here are some example uses for which the Prestige is well suited.

1.3.1 Internet Access

The Prestige is the ideal high-speed Internet access solution. Your Prestige supports the TCP/IP protocol, which the Internet uses exclusively. It is compatible with all major ADSL DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line

Getting To Know Your Prestige 1-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Access Multiplexer) providers. A DSLAM is a rack of ADSL line cards with data multiplexed into a backbone network interface/connection (for example, T1, OC3, DS3, ATM or Frame Relay). Think of it as the equivalent of a modem rack for ADSL. A typical Internet access application is shown below.

Figure 1-1 Prestige Internet Access Application

Internet Single User Account

For a SOHO (Small Office/Home Office) environment, your Prestige offers the Single User Account (SUA) feature that allows multiple users on the LAN (Local Area Network) to access the Internet concurrently for the cost of a single IP address.

1.3.2 LAN to LAN Application

You can use the Prestige to connect two geogr aphical ly dispersed networks over the ADSL line. A typical

LAN-to-LAN application for your Prestige is shown as follows.

Figure 1-2 Prestige LAN-to-LAN Application

1-6 Getting To Know Your Prestige

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 2

Introducing the Web Configurator

This chapter describes how to access and navigate the web configurator.

2.1 Web Configurator Overview

The embedded web configurator allows you to manage the Prestige from anywhere through a browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape

Navigator 7.0 and later versions with JavaScript enabled. It is recommended that you set your screen resolution to 1024 by 768 pixels

2.2 Accessing the Prestige Web Configurator

Step 1.

Step 2.

Step 3.

Step 4.

Step 5.

Make sure your Prestige hardware is properly connected (refer to the

Read Me First

).

Prepare your computer/computer network to connect to the Prestige (refer to the

Read Me

First

).

Launch your web browser.

Type "192.168.1.1" as the URL.

An

Enter Network Password

window displays. Enter the user name (“admin” is the default), password (“1234” is the default) and click

OK

.

Step 6.

Figure 2-1 Password Screen

You should now see the

SITE MAP

screen.

Introducing the Web Configurator 2-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

The Prestige automatically times out after five minutes of inactivity. Simply log back into the Prestige if this happens to you.

2.3 Resetting the Prestige

If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the

RESET

button at the back of the Prestige to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to “1234”.

2.3.1 Using The Reset Button

Step 1.

Make sure the

SYS

LED is on (not blinking).

Step 2.

Press the

RESET

button for ten seconds or until the

SYS

LED begins to blink and then release it.

When the

SYS

LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the Prestige restarts.

2.4 Navigating the Prestige Web Configurator

The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the

SITE MAP

screen. We use the

Prestige 660HW-61 web screens in this guide as an example. Screens vary slightly for different Prestige models.

Click

Wizard Setup

to begin a series of screens to configure your Prestige for the first time.

Click a link under

Advanced Setup

to configure advanced Prestige features.

Click a link under

Maintenance

to see Prestige performance statistics, upload firmware and back up, restore or upload a configuration file.

Click

SITE MAP

to go to the

Site Map

screen.

Click

Logout

in the navigation panel when you have finished a Prestige management session.

2-2 Introducing the Web Configurator

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Wizard Setup

Navigation panel

Logout

Figure 2-2 Web Configurator SITE MAP Screen

Click the icon (located in the top right corner of most screens) to view embedded help.

Table 2-1 Web Configurator Screens Summary

LINK SUB-LINK

Wizard Setup

FUNCTION

Use these screens for initial configuration including general setup, ISP parameters for Internet Access and WAN IP/DNS Server/MAC address assignment.

Advanced Setup

Password

LAN

WAN

NAT

Dynamic DNS

WAN Setup

WAN Backup

SUA Only

Full Feature

Use this screen to change your password.

Use this screen to configure LAN DHCP and TCP/IP settings.

Use this screen to change the Prestige’s WAN remote node settings.

Use this screen to configure your traffic redirect properties and WAN backup settings.

Use this screen to configure servers behind the Prestige.

Use this screen to configure network address translation mapping rules.

Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS.

Introducing the Web Configurator 2-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 2-1 Web Configurator Screens Summary

LINK SUB-LINK

Time and Date

FUNCTION

Use this screen to change your Prestige’s time and date.

Remote

Management

UPnP

Logs Log Settings

Maintenance

System Status

DHCP Table

View Log

Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which

IP address(es) users can use Telnet/FTP/Web to manage the

Prestige.

Use this screen to enable UPnP on the Prestige.

Use this screen to change your Prestige’s log settings.

Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected.

Diagnostic

Firmware

LOGOUT

General

DSL Line

This screen contains administrative and system-related information.

This screen displays DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) related information and is READ-ONLY.

These screens display information to help you identify problems with the Prestige general connection.

These screens display information to help you identify problems with the DSL line.

Use this screen to upload firmware or reset the factory defaults to your

Prestige

Click this label to exit the web configurator.

2-4 Introducing the Web Configurator

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 3

Wizard Setup

This chapter provides information on the Wizard Setup screens in the web configurator.

3.1 Wizard Setup Introduction

Use the Wizard Setup screens to configure your system for Internet access settings and fill in the fields with the information in the

Internet Account Information

table of the

Read Me First

. Your ISP may have already configured some of the fields in the wizard screens for you.

3.2 Encapsulation

Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The Prestige supports the following methods.

3.2.1 ENET ENCAP

The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol (ENET ENCAP) is only implemented with the IP network protocol. IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells. ENET ENCAP requires that you specify a gateway IP address in the

ENET

ENCAP Gateway

field in the second wizard screen. You can get this information from your ISP.

3.2.2 PPP over Ethernet

PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP.

The Prestige bridges a PPP session over Ethernet (PPP over Ethernet, RFC 2516) from your computer to an

ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) which connects to ADSL Access Concentrator where the PPP session terminates. One PVC can support any number of PPP sessions from your LAN. For more information on

PPPoE, see the appendix.

3.2.3 PPPoA

PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The Prestige encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Provider’s (ISP)

DSLAM (digital access multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to

RFC 1661 for more information on PPP.

Wizard Setup 3-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

3.2.4 RFC 1483

RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5).

The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit (LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to the RFC for more detailed information.

3.3 Multiplexing

There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP.

3.3.1 VC-based Multiplexing

In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example,

VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical.

3.3.2 LLC-based Multiplexing

In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.

Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers assigned to you. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Please see the appendix for more information.

3.5 Wizard Setup Configuration: First Screen

In the

SITE MAP

screen click

Wizard Setup

to display the first wizard screen.

3-2 Wizard Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 3-1 Wizard Screen 1

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

LABEL

Mode

Table 3-1 Wizard Screen 1

DESCRIPTION

From the

Mode

drop-down list box, select

Routing

(default) if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account. Otherwise select

Bridge

.

Encapsulation Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the

Encapsulation

drop-down list box.

Choices vary depending on what you select in the

Mode

field.

If you select

Bridge

in the

Mode

field, select either

PPPoA

or

RFC 1483

.

If you select

Routing

in the

Mode

field, select

PPPoA

,

RFC 1483

,

ENET ENCAP

or

PPPoE

.

Multiplex

Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the

Multiplex

drop-down list box either

VC-based or LLC-based.

Virtual Circuit

ID

VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information.

VPI Enter the VPI assigned to you. This field may already be configured.

VCI Enter the VCI assigned to you. This field may already be configured.

Wizard Setup 3-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

LABEL

Next

Table 3-1 Wizard Screen 1

DESCRIPTION

Click this button to go to the next wizard screen. The next wizard screen you see depends on what protocol you chose above. Click on the protocol link to see the next wizard screen for that protocol.

3.6 IP Address and Subnet Mask

Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number.

Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.

If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the

Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the Prestige. The Internet Assigned Number Authority

(IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.

Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance,

192.168.1.1, for your Prestige, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address.

The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Prestige will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the Prestige unless you are instructed to do otherwise.

3.7 IP Address Assignment

A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and ENET

ENCAP Gateway.

3-4 Wizard Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

3.7.1 IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation

If you have a dynamic IP, then the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable (N/A). If you have a static IP, then you

only

need to fill in the IP Address field and

not

the ENET ENCAP Gateway field.

3.7.2 IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation

In this case the IP Address Assignment

must

be static with the same requirements for the IP Address and

ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as stated above.

3.7.3 IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation

In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP. For a static IP you must fill in all the IP Address and

ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as supplied by your ISP. However for a dynamic IP, the Prestige acts as a

DHCP client on the WAN port and so the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable

(N/A) as the DHCP server assigns them to the Prestige.

3.7.4 Private IP Addresses

Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255

172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255

192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255

You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses.

Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597,

Address Allocation for Private Internets

and RFC 1466,

Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.

Wizard Setup 3-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

3.8 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP)

A nailed-up connection is a dial-up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand. The

Prestige does two things when you specify a nailed-up connection. The first is that idle timeout is disabled.

The second is that the Prestige will try to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection is down. A nailed-up connection can be very expensive for obvious reasons.

Do not specify a nailed-up connection unless your telephone company offers flat-rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern

3.9 NAT

NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network.

3.10 Wizard Setup Configuration: Second Screen

The second wizard screen varies depending on what mode and encapsulation type you use. All screens shown are with routing mode. Configure the fields and click

Next

to continue.

3-6

Figure 3-2 Internet Connection with PPPoE

Wizard Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

LABEL

Table 3-2 Internet Connection with PPPoE

DESCRIPTION

Service Name Type the name of your PPPoE service here.

User Name

Password

IP Address

Connection

Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given.

Enter the password associated with the user name above.

A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. The Single User

Account feature can be used with either a dynamic or static IP address.

Select

Obtain an IP Address Automatically

if you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise select

Static IP Address

and type your ISP assigned IP address in the

IP Address

text box below.

Select

Connect on Demand

when you don't want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out (in seconds) in the

Max. Idle Timeout

field. The default setting selects

Connection on Demand

with 0 as the idle time-out, which means the Internet session will not timeout.

Select

Nailed-Up Connection

when you want your connection up all the time. The Prestige will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected.

The schedule rule(s) in SMT menu 26 has priority over your

Connection

settings.

Select

None

,

SUA Only

or

Full Feature

from the drop-sown list box. Refer to the NAT chapter for more details.

Network

Address

Translation

Back

Next

Click

Back

to go back to the first wizard screen.

Click

Next

to continue to the next wizard screen.

Wizard Setup 3-7

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 3-3 Internet Connection with RFC 1483

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

LABEL

IP Address

Network Address

Translation

Back

Next

Table 3-3 Internet Connection with RFC 1483

DESCRIPTION

This field is available if you select

Routing

in the

Mode

field.

Type your ISP assigned IP address in this field.

Select

None

,

SUA Only

or

Full Feature

from the drop-sown list box. Refer to the NAT chapter for more details.

Click

Back

to go back to the first wizard screen.

Click

Next

to continue to the next wizard screen.

3-8 Wizard Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 3-4 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

LABEL

IP Address

Table 3-4 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP

DESCRIPTION

A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. The

Single User Account feature can be used with either a dynamic or static IP address.

Select

Obtain an IP Address Automatically

if you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise select

Static IP Address

and type your ISP assigned IP address in the

IP

Address

text box below.

Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.

Refer to the

IP Subnetting

appendix to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting.

ENET ENCAP

Gateway

You must specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) when you use

ENET

ENCAP

in the

Encapsulation

field in the previous screen.

Wizard Setup 3-9

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

LABEL

Network Address

Translation

Back

Next

Table 3-4 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP

DESCRIPTION

Select

None

,

SUA Only

or

Full Feature

from the drop-sown list box. Refer to the NAT chapter for more details.

Click

Back

to go back to the first wizard screen.

Click

Next

to continue to the next wizard screen.

Figure 3-5 Internet Connection with PPPoA

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

3-10 Wizard Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

LABEL

User Name

Password

IP Address

Connection

Network

Address

Translation

Back

Next

Table 3-5 Internet Connection with PPPoA

DESCRIPTION

Enter the login name that your ISP gives you.

Enter the password associated with the user name above.

This option is available if you select

Routing

in the

Mode

field.

A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. The Single User

Account feature can be used with either a dynamic or static IP address.

Click

Obtain an IP Address Automatically

if you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise click

Static IP Address

and type your ISP assigned IP address in the

IP Address

text box below.

Select

Connect on Demand

when you don't want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out (in seconds) in the

Max. Idle Timeout

field. The default setting selects

Connection on Demand

with 0 as the idle time-out, which means the Internet session will not timeout.

Select

Nailed-Up Connection

when you want your connection up all the time. The Prestige will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected.

The schedule rule(s) in SMT menu 26 has priority over your

Connection

settings.

This option is available if you select

Routing

in the

Mode

field.

Select

None

,

SUA Only

or

Full Feature

from the drop-sown list box. Refer to the NAT chapter for more details.

Click

Back

to go back to the first wizard screen.

Click

Next

to continue to the next wizard screen.

3.11 DHCP Setup

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain

TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Prestige as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the Prestige provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn

DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.

Wizard Setup 3-11

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

3.11.1 IP Pool Setup

The Prestige is pre-configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64 for the client machines. This leaves 31 IP addresses, 192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.32 (excluding the Prestige itself which has a default IP of 192.168.1.1) for other server machines, for example, server for mail, FTP, telnet, web, etc., that you may have.

3.12 Wizard Setup Configuration: Third Screen

Step 1.

Verify the settings in the screen shown next. To change the LAN information on the Prestige, click

Change LAN Configurations

. Otherwise click

Save Settings

to save the configuration and skip to the section 3.13.

Figure 3-6 Wizard Screen 3

Step 2.

If you want to change your Prestige LAN settings, click

Change LAN Configuration

to display the screen as shown next.

3-12 Wizard Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 3-7 Wizard : LAN Configuration

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

LABEL

LAN IP Address

Table 3-6 Wizard : LAN Configuration

DESCRIPTION

Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation, for example,

192.168.1.1 (factory default).

If you changed the Prestige's LAN IP address, you must use the new IP address if you want to access the web configurator again.

LAN Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.

DHCP

DHCP Server From the

DHCP Server

drop-down list box, select

On

to allow your Prestige to assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computer systems that support the DHCP client. Select

Off

to disable DHCP server.

When DHCP server is used, set the following items:

Wizard Setup 3-13

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

LABEL

Table 3-6 Wizard : LAN Configuration

DESCRIPTION

Client IP Pool Starting

Address

This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.

Size of Client IP Pool This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool.

Primary DNS Server Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers. The DNS servers are passed to the

DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask.

Secondary DNS Server As above.

Back Click

Back

to go back to the previous screen.

Finish

Click

Finish

to save the settings and proceed to the next wizard screen.

3.13 Wizard Setup Configuration: Connection Tests

The Prestige automatically tests the connection to the computer(s) connected to the LAN ports. To test the connection from the Prestige to the ISP, click

Start Diagnose

. Otherwise click

Return to Main Menu

to go back to the

Site Map

screen.

3-14

Figure 3-8 Wizard Screen 4

Wizard Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

3.14 Test Your Internet Connection

Launch your web browser and navigate to www.zyxel.com

. Internet access is just the beginning. Refer to the rest of this

User’s Guide

for more detailed information on the complete range of Prestige features. If you cannot access the Internet, open the web configurator again to confirm that the Internet settings you configured in the Wizard Setup are correct.

Wizard Setup 3-15

Password, LAN and WAN

Part II:

Password, LAN and WAN

This part covers the password, LAN (Local Area Network) and WAN setup.

II

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 4

Password Setup

This chapter provides information on the Password screen.

It is highly recommended that you change the password for accessing the Prestige.

To change your Prestige’s password (recommended), click

Password

. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 4-1 Password

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 4-1 Password

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field.

New Password Type the new password in this field.

Password Setup 4-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 4-1 Password

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Retype to Confirm Type the new password again in this field.

Apply

Cancel

Click

Click

Apply

to save your changes back to the Prestige.

Cancel

to begin configuring this screen afresh.

4-2 Password Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 5

LAN Setup

This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings.

A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. A

LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area, usually the same building or floor of a building.

The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses.

5.1.1 LANs, WANs and the Prestige

The actual physical connection determines whether the Prestige ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next:

Figure 5-1 LAN and WAN IP Addresses

DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa.

The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it. The DNS server addresses that you enter in the DHCP setup are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.

LAN Setup 5-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses. The first is for an ISP to tell a customer the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when s/he signs up. If your

ISP gives you the DNS server addresses, enter them in the

DNS Server

fields in the

LAN Setup

screen, otherwise, leave them blank.

Some ISP’s choose to pass the DNS servers using the DNS server extensions of PPP IPCP (IP Control

Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The Prestige supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature.

If the

Primary

and

Secondary DNS Server

fields in the

LAN Setup

screen are not specified, for instance, left as 0.0.0.0, the Prestige tells the DHCP clients that it itself is the DNS server. When a computer sends a

DNS query to the Prestige, the Prestige forwards the query to the real DNS server learned through IPCP and relays the response back to the computer.

Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the

LAN Setup

screen. This way, the

Prestige can pass the DNS servers to the computers and the computers can query the DNS server directly without the Prestige’s intervention.

5.3 DNS Server Address Assignment

Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The

DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it.

There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses.

1. The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in DHCP Setup.

2. The Prestige acts as a DNS proxy when the

Primary

and

Secondary DNS Server

fields are left blank in the

LAN Setup

screen.

5.4 LAN TCP/IP

The Prestige has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability.

5.4.1 Factory LAN Defaults

The LAN parameters of the Prestige are preset in the factory with the following values:

IP address of 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 (24 bits)

DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33.

5-2 LAN Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

These parameters should work for the majority of installations. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address(es), read the embedded web configurator help regarding what fields need to be configured.

5.4.2 IP Address and Subnet Mask

Refer to the

IP Address and Subnet Mask

section in the

Wizard Setup

chapter for this information.

5.4.3 RIP Setup

RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. The

RIP Direction

field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets. When set to:

1.

Both -

the Prestige will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives.

2.

In Only -

the Prestige will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received.

3.

Out Only -

the Prestige will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received.

4.

None

-

the Prestige will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received.

The

Version

field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Prestige sends

(it recognizes both formats when receiving).

RIP-1

is universally supported; but RIP-2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology.

Both

RIP-2B

and

RIP-2M

sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that

RIP-2B

uses subnet broadcasting while

RIP-2M

uses multicasting.

5.4.4 Multicast

Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or

Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1.

IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a

Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of

RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to

239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers.

The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts

(including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address

224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group.

The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 (

IGMP-v1

) and IGMP version 2 (

IGMP-v2

). At start up, the

Prestige queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the Prestige periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the Prestige LAN and/or

WAN interfaces in the web configurator (

LAN

;

WAN

). Select

None

to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces.

LAN Setup 5-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Click

LAN

to open the following screen.

Figure 5-2 LAN

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

LABEL

DHCP

Table 5-1 LAN

DESCRIPTION

DHCP

If set to

Server

, your Prestige can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95, Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client.

If set to

None

, the DHCP server will be disabled.

If set to

Relay

, the Prestige acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. Enter the IP address of the actual, remote DHCP server in the

Remote DHCP Server

field in this case.

When DHCP is used, the following items need to be set:

5-4 LAN Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

LABEL

Client IP Pool

Starting Address

Size of Client IP

Pool

Table 5-1 LAN

DESCRIPTION

This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.

This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool.

Primary DNS

Server

Secondary DNS

Server

Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers. The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask.

As above.

Remote DHCP

Server

TCP/IP

If

Relay

is selected in the

DHCP

field above then enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server here.

IP Address

Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation, for example,

192.168.1.1 (factory default).

IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given).

RIP Direction

Select the RIP direction from

None

,

Both

,

In Only

and

Out Only

.

RIP Version Select the RIP version from

RIP-1

,

RIP-2B

and

RIP-2M

.

Multicast

IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 (

IGMP-v1

) and

IGMP-v2

. Select

None

to disable it.

Apply

Cancel

Click

Apply

to save your changes back to the Prestige.

Click

Cancel

to begin configuring this screen afresh.

LAN Setup 5-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 6

WAN Setup

This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings.

A WAN (Wide Area Network) is an outside connection to another network or the Internet.

See the

Wizard Setup

chapter for more information on the fields in the WAN screens.

6.2 Metric

The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of "1" for directly connected networks. The number must be between "1" and "15"; a number greater than "15" means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the "cost".

The metric sets the priority for the Prestige’s routes to the Internet. If any two of the default routes have the same metric, the Prestige uses the following pre-defined priorities: route:

section 6.5

)

2. Traffic-redirect route (see

section 6.6

) route,

section 6.6

)

For example, if the normal route has a metric of "1" and the traffic-redirect route has a metric of "2" and dialbackup route has a metric of "3", then the normal route acts as the primary default route. If the normal route fails to connect to the Internet, the Prestige tries the traffic-redirect route next. In the same manner, the

Prestige uses the dial-backup route if the traffic-redirect route also fails.

If you want the dial-backup route to take first priority over the traffic-redirect route or even the normal route, all you need to do is set the dial-backup route’s metric to "1" and the others to "2" (or greater).

IP Policy Routing overrides the default routing behavior and takes priority over all of the routes mentioned above (see the

IP Policy Routing

chapter).

The Prestige supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard (RFC

2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The

PPPoE

option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE.

WAN Setup 6-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example Radius). PPPoE provides a login and authentication method that the existing

Microsoft Dial-Up Networking software can activate, and therefore requires no new learning or procedures for Windows users.

One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals.

Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.

By implementing PPPoE directly on the Prestige (rather than individual computers), the computers on the

LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the Prestige does that part of the task. Furthermore, with

NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.

Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections.

Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower

(but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of

832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed.

Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR.

Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again.

If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of “0”, the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate.

The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS.

6-2 WAN Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 6-1 Example of Traffic Shaping

6.5 Configuring WAN Setup

To change your Prestige’s WAN remote node settings, click

WAN

,

WAN Setup

.

The screen differs by the encapsulation.

WAN Setup 6-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 6-2 WAN Setup

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

6-4 WAN Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 6-1 WAN Setup

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Name Enter the name of your Internet Service Provider, e.g., MyISP. This information is for identification purposes only.

Mode Select

Routing

(default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account. Otherwise select

Bridge

.

Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box.

Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the

Mode

field.

If you select

Bridge

in the

Mode

field, select either

PPPoA

or

RFC 1483

.

If you select

Routing

in the

Mode

field, select

PPPoA

,

RFC 1483

,

ENET ENCAP

or

PPPoE

.

Multiplex Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices are

VC

or

LLC

.

Virtual Circuit ID

VPI

VCI

VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit.

Refer to the appendix for more information.

The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.

The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of

ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.

ATM QoS Type Select

CBR

(Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select

UBR

(Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select

VBR

(Variable Bit Rate) for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications.

Cell Rate Cell rate configuration often helps eliminate traffic congestion that slows transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections.

Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell

Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the

PCR here.

Sustain Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec.

WAN Setup 6-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 6-1 WAN Setup

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.

Login Information (PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only)

Service Name (PPPoE only) Type the name of your PPPoE service here.

User Name

Password

IP Address

Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given.

Enter the password associated with the user name above.

This option is available if you select

Routing

in the

Mode

field.

A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. The

Single User Account feature can be used with either a dynamic or static IP address.

Select

Obtain an IP Address Automatically

if you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise select

Static IP Address

and type your ISP assigned IP address in the

IP

Address

field below.

Connection

(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only)

The schedule rule(s) in SMT menu 26 have priority over your

Connection

settings.

Nailed-Up Connection Select

Nailed-Up Connection

when you want your connection up all the time. The

Prestige will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected.

Connect on Demand Select

Connect on Demand

when you don't want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out in the

Max Idle Timeout

field.

Max Idle Timeout Specify an idle time-out in the

Max Idle Timeout

field when you select

Connect on

Demand

. The default setting is 0, which means the Internet session will not timeout.

PPPoE Pass Through This field is available when you select

PPPoE

encapsulation.

6-6 WAN Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 6-1 WAN Setup

LABEL DESCRIPTION

PPPoE +

PPPoE_Client_PC

(PPPoE encapsulation only)

In addition to the Prestige's built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Prestige. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address.

PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate.

Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use

PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP.

Subnet Mask

(ENET ENCAP encapsulation only)

ENET ENCAP

Gateway

(ENET ENCAP encapsulation only)

Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.

Refer to the

Subnetting

appendix on how to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting.

You must specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) when you select

ENET

ENCAP

in the

Encapsulation

field

Back

Apply

Cancel

Click

Back

to return to the previous screen.

Click

Apply

to save the changes.

Click

Cancel

to begin configuring this screen afresh.

6.6 Traffic Redirect

Traffic redirect forwards traffic to a backup gateway when the Prestige cannot connect to the Internet. An example is shown in the figure below.

WAN Setup 6-7

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 6-3 Traffic Redirect Example

The following network topology allows you to avoid triangle route security issues when the backup gateway is connected to the LAN. Use IP alias to configure the LAN into two or three logical networks with the

Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network. Put the protected LAN in one subnet (Subnet 1 in the following figure) and the backup gateway in another subnet (Subnet 2). Configure filters that allow packets from the protected LAN (Subnet 1) to the backup gateway (Subnet 2).

Figure 6-4 Traffic Redirect LAN Setup

6.7 Configuring WAN Backup

To change your Prestige’s WAN backup settings, click

WAN

, then

WAN Backup

. The screen appears as shown.

6-8 WAN Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 6-5 WAN Backup

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

WAN Setup 6-9

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 6-2 WAN Backup

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Backup Type

Check WAN IP

Address1-3

Select the method that the Prestige uses to check the DSL connection.

Select

DSL Link

to have the Prestige check if the connection to the DSLAM is up. Select

ICMP

to have the Prestige periodically ping the IP addresses configured in the

Check WAN IP Address

fields.

Configure this field to test your Prestige's WAN accessibility. Type the IP address of a reliable nearby computer (for example, your ISP's DNS server address).

If you activate either traffic redirect or dial backup, you must configure at least one IP address here.

Fail Tolerance

When using a WAN backup connection, the Prestige periodically pings the addresses configured here and uses the other WAN backup connection (if configured) if there is no response.

Type the number of times (2 recommended) that your Prestige may ping the IP addresses configured in the

Check WAN IP Address

fields without getting a response before switching to a WAN backup connection (or a different WAN backup connection).

Recovery Interval

Timeout

When the Prestige is using a lower priority connection (usually a WAN backup connection), it periodically checks to whether or not it can use a higher priority connection.

Type the number of seconds (30 recommended) for the Prestige to wait between checks. Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic.

Type the number of seconds (3 recommended) for your Prestige to wait for a ping response from one of the IP addresses in the

Check WAN IP Address

fields before timing out the request. The WAN connection is considered "down" after the Prestige times out the number of times specified in the

Fail Tolerance

field.

Use a higher value in this field if your network is busy or congested.

Traffic Redirect

Active Select this check box to have the Prestige use traffic redirect if the normal WAN connection goes down.

If you activate traffic redirect, you must configure at least one

Check WAN IP Address

.

6-10 WAN Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 6-2 WAN Backup

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Metric This field sets this route's priority among the routes the Prestige uses.

The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of "1" for directly connected networks. The number must be between "1" and "15"; a number greater than "15" means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the

"cost".

Backup Gateway Type the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation. The

Prestige automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the Prestige's Internet connection terminates.

Back

Apply

Cancel

Click

Back

to return to the previous screen.

Click

Apply

to save the changes.

Click

Cancel

to begin configuring this screen afresh.

WAN Setup 6-11

NAT, Dynamic DNS and Time and Date

Part III:

NAT, Dynamic DNS and Time and Date

This part covers NAT (Network Address Translation), dynamic DNS (Domain Name Sever) and

Time and Date setup.

III

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 7

Network Address Translation (NAT)

Screens

This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the

Prestige

.

NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network.

7.1.1 NAT Definitions

Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Prestige, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts.

Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side.

Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information.

Table 7-1 NAT Definitions

ITEM DESCRIPTION

Inside This refers to the host on the LAN.

Outside This refers to the host on the WAN.

Local

Global

This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN.

This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN.

NAT 7-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an

outside

host.

7.1.2 What NAT Does

In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed.

The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-to-One and Many-to-

Many Overload mapping – see

Table 7-2

), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your Prestige filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to

RFC 1631

,

The IP Network Address

Translator (NAT)

.

7.1.3 How NAT Works

Each packet has two addresses – a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA

(Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The Prestige keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this.

7-2

Figure 7-1 How NAT Works

NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

7.1.4 NAT Application

The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs using IP

Alias) behind the Prestige can communicate with three distinct WAN networks. More examples follow at the end of this chapter.

Figure 7-2 NAT Application With IP Alias

7.1.5 NAT Mapping Types

NAT supports five types of IP/port mapping. They are:

1.

One to One

: In One-to-One mode, the Prestige maps one local IP address to one global IP address.

2.

Many to One

: In Many-to-One mode, the Prestige maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (for instance, PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL’s Single User

Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported (the

SUA Only

option in today’s routers).

NAT 7-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

3.

Many to Many Overload

: In Many-to-Many Overload mode, the Prestige maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.

4.

Many-to-Many No Overload

: In Many-to-Many No Overload mode, the Prestige maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address.

5.

Server

: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world.

Port numbers do

not

change for

One-to-One

and

Many-to-Many No Overload

NAT mapping types.

The following table summarizes these types.

Table 7-2 NAT Mapping Types

TYPE IP ABBREVIATION

One-to-One ILA1 ÅÆ IGA1

Many-to-One (SUA/PAT) ILA1

ÅÆ

IGA1

ILA2 ÅÆ IGA1

1:1

M:1

Many-to-Many Overload ILA1 ÅÆ IGA1

ILA2 ÅÆ IGA2

ILA3 ÅÆ IGA1

ILA4 ÅÆ IGA2

Many-to-Many No Overload ILA1 ÅÆ IGA1

ILA2 ÅÆ IGA2

ILA3 ÅÆ IGA3

Server Server 1 IP

ÅÆ

IGA1

Server 2 IP

ÅÆ

IGA1

Server 3 IP ÅÆ IGA1

M:M Ov

M:M No OV

Server

7.2 SUA (Single User Account) Versus NAT

SUA (Single User Account) is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping,

Many-to-One

and

Server

. The Prestige also supports

Full Feature

NAT to map multiple global

IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types as outlined in

Table 7-2

.

7-4 NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

1. Choose if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige.

2. Choose if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige.

7.3 SUA Server

A SUA server set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though SUA makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world.

You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service

(for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports.

Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or

FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.

Default Server IP Address

In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen.

If you do not assign an IP address in

Server Set 1

(default server), the Prestige discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup.

7.3.1 Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers

The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers.

Table 7-3 Services and Port Numbers

ECHO 7

FTP (File Transfer Protocol) 21

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

DNS (Domain Name System)

25

53

Finger 79

HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) 80

NAT 7-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 7-3 Services and Port Numbers

POP3 (Post Office Protocol)

NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol)

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)

SNMP trap

PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)

110

119

161

162

1723

7.3.2 Configuring Servers Behind SUA (Example)

Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.

Figure 7-3 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example

IP address assigned by ISP.

7.4 Selecting the NAT Mode

You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up SUA/NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the Prestige.

Click

NAT

to open the following screen.

7-6 NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 7-4 NAT Mode

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 7-4 NAT Mode

LABEL DESCRIPTION

None Select this radio button to disable NAT.

SUA Only

Select this radio button if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige. The

Prestige uses Address Mapping Set 1 in the

NAT - Edit SUA/NAT Server Set

screen.

Edit Details Click this link to go to the

NAT - Edit SUA/NAT Server Set

screen.

Full Feature Select this radio button if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige.

Edit Details Click this link to go to the

NAT - Address Mapping Rules

screen.

Apply Click

Apply

to save your configuration.

7.5 Configuring SUA Server

If you do not assign an IP address in

Server Set 1

(default server), the Prestige discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup.

Click

NAT

, select

SUA Only

and click

Edit Details

to open the following screen.

Refer to

Table 7-3

for port numbers commonly used for particular services.

NAT 7-7

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 7-5 Edit SUA/NAT Server Set

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 7-5 Edit SUA/NAT Server Set

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Start Port No. Enter a port number in this field.

To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the

End Port No.

field.

To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the

End Port No.

field.

7-8 NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 7-5 Edit SUA/NAT Server Set

LABEL DESCRIPTION

End Port No. Enter a port number in this field.

To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the

Start Port No.

field above and then enter it again in this field.

To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the

Start Port No.

field above.

Server IP

Address

Enter your server IP address in this field.

Save

Cancel

Click

Save

to save your changes back to the Prestige.

Click

Cancel

to return to the previous configuration.

Ordering your rules is important because the Prestige applies the rules in the order that you specify. When a rule matches the current packet, the Prestige takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored. If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule, your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty rules. For example, if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9. In the set summary screen, the new rule will be rule 7, not 9. Now if you delete rule 4, rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by 1 rule, so old rules 5, 6 and 7 become new rules 4, 5 and

6.

To change your Prestige’s address mapping settings, click

NAT

, Select

Full Feature

and click

Edit Details

to open the following screen.

NAT 7-9

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 7-6 Address Mapping Rules

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 7-6 Address Mapping Rules

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). Local IP addresses are

N/A

for

Server

port mapping.

Local End IP This is the end Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the

Local Start IP

address and 255.255.255.255 as the

Local End IP

address. This field is

N/A

for

One-to-one

and

Server

mapping types.

Global Start IP This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for

Many-to-One

and

Server

mapping types.

Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is

N/A

for

One-to-one

,

Many-to-One

and

Server

mapping types.

7-10 NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 7-6 Address Mapping Rules

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Type

1-1

: One-to-one mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.

M-1

: Many-to-One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL's Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only.

M-M Ov

(Overload): Many-to-Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.

MM No

(No Overload): Many-to-Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses.

Server

: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the

NAT to be accessible to the outside world.

Back Click

Back

to return to the

NAT Mode

screen.

7.7 Editing an Address Mapping Rule

To edit an address mapping rule, click the rule’s link in the

NAT Address Mapping Rules

screen to display the screen shown next.

Figure 7-7 Address Mapping Rule Edit

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

NAT 7-11

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 7-7 Address Mapping Rule Edit

Type

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Choose the port mapping type from one of the following.

1.

One-to-One

: One-to-One mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for One-to-one NAT mapping type.

2.

Many-to-One

: Many-to-One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global

IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL's

Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only.

3.

Many-to-Many Overload

: Many-to-Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.

4.

Many-to-Many No Overload

: Many-to-Many No Overload mode maps each local

IP address to unique global IP addresses.

5.

Server

: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world.

Local Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA). Local IP addresses are

N/A

for

Server

port mapping.

Local End IP

Global Start IP

Global End IP

This is the end local IP address (ILA). If your rule is for all local IP addresses, then enter 0.0.0.0 as the

Local Start IP

address and 255.255.255.255 as the

Local End

IP

address.

This field is

N/A

for

One-to-One

and

Server

mapping types.

This is the starting global IP address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic

IP address from your ISP.

This is the ending global IP address (IGA). This field is

N/A

for

One-to-One

,

Manyto-One

and

Server

mapping types.

Server Mapping

Set

Only available when

Type

is set to

Server

.

Select a number from the drop-down menu to choose a server set from the

NAT -

Address Mapping Rules

screen.

Apply

Edit Details Click this link to go to the

NAT - Edit SUA/NAT Server Set

screen to edit a server set that you have selected in the

Server Mapping Set

field.

Click

Apply

to save your changes back to the Prestige.

Cancel

Delete

Click

Cancel

to return to the previously saved settings.

Click

Delete

to exit this screen without saving.

7-12 NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 8

Dynamic DNS Setup

This chapter discusses how to configure your Prestige to use Dynamic DNS.

Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address.

First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic

DNS service provider will give you a password or key.

8.1.1 DYNDNS Wildcard

Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.

If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.

8.2 Configuring Dynamic DNS

To change your Prestige’s DDNS, click

Dynamic DNS

. The screen appears as shown.

Dynamic DNS Setup 8-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 8-1 DDNS

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 8-1 DDNS

Active

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Select this check box to use dynamic DNS.

Service Provider This is the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider.

Host Names

E-mail Address

User

Password

Type the domain name assigned to your Prestige by your Dynamic DNS provider.

Type your e-mail address.

Type your user name.

Type the password assigned to you.

Enable Wildcard

Apply

Cancel

Select the check box to enable DYNDNS Wildcard.

Click

Apply

to save your changes back to the Prestige.

Click

Cancel

to begin configuring this screen afresh.

8-2 Dynamic DNS Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 9

Time and Date

This screen is not available on all models. Use this screen to configure the Prestige’s time and date settings.

9.1 Configuring Time and Date

To change your Prestige’s time and date, click

Time And Date

. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the Prestige’s time based on your local time zone.

Time and Date

Figure 9-1 Time and Date

9-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 9-1 Time and Date

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Time Server

Use Protocol when

Bootup

Select the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the

Prestige. Not all time servers support all protocols, so you may have to check with your ISP/network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works.

The main difference between them is the format.

Daytime (RFC 867)

format is day/month/year/time zone of the server.

Time (RFC 868)

format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0.

The default,

NTP (RFC 1305),

is similar to Time (RFC 868).

Select

None

to enter the time and date manually.

IP Address or URL Enter the IP address or URL of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information (the default is tick.stdtime.gov.tw).

Time and Date Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Daylight Savings Select this option if you use daylight savings time. Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.

Start Date Enter the month and day that your daylight-savings time starts on if you selected

Daylight Savings

.

End Date Enter the month and day that your daylight-savings time ends on if you selected

Daylight Savings

.

Synchronize system clock with

Time Server now.

Select this option to have your Prestige use the time server (that you configured above) to set its internal system clock.

Please wait for up to 60 seconds while the Prestige locates the time server. If the

Prestige cannot find the time server, please check the time server protocol and its IP address. If the IP address was entered correctly, try pinging it for example to test the connection.

Date

Current Date This field displays the date of your Prestige.

Each time you reload this page, the Prestige synchronizes the time with the time server.

9-2 Time and Date

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 9-1 Time and Date

LABEL DESCRIPTION

New Date (yyyymm-dd)

This field displays the last updated date from the time server.

When you select

None

in the

Use Protocol when Bootup

field, enter the new date in this field and then click

Apply

.

Time

Current Time This field displays the time of your Prestige.

Each time you reload this page, the Prestige synchronizes the time with the time server.

New Time This field displays the last updated time from the time server.

When you select

None

in the

Use Protocol when Bootup

field, enter the new time in this field and then click

Apply

.

Apply

Cancel

Click

Apply

to save your changes back to the Prestige.

Click

Cancel

to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Time and Date 9-3

Remote Management and UPnP

Part IV:

Remote Management and UPnP

This part contains information on how to configure the Prestige for remote management and setting up Universal Plug and Play (UPnP).

IV

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 10

Remote Management Configuration

This chapter provides information on configuring remote management.

10.1 Remote Management Overview

Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which Prestige interface

(if any) from which computers.

You may manage your Prestige from a remote location via:

Internet (WAN only) ALL (LAN and WAN)

LAN only, Neither (Disable).

To disable remote management of a service, select

Disable

in the corresponding

Server Access

field.

You may only have one remote management session running at a time. The Prestige automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts. The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows.

1. Telnet

2. HTTP

10.1.1 Remote Management Limitations

Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when:

1. A filter in SMT menu 3.1 (LAN) or in menu 11.5 (WAN) is applied to block a Telnet, FTP or Web service.

2. You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens.

3. The IP address in the

Secured Client IP

field does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the Prestige will disconnect the session immediately.

4. There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running. You may only have one remote management session running at one time.

Remote Management Configuration 10-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

10.1.2 Remote Management and NAT

When NAT is enabled:

Use the Prestige’s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN.

Use the Prestige’s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.

10.1.3 System Timeout

There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The Prestige automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling.

10.2 Telnet

You can configure your Prestige for remote Telnet access as shown next.

Figure 10-1 Telnet Configuration on a TCP/IP Network

10.3 FTP

You can upload and download Prestige firmware and configuration files using FTP. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client.

10.4 Web

You can use the Prestige’s embedded web configurator for configuration and file management. See the online help for details.

10-2 Remote Management Configuration

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

10.5 Configuring Remote Management

Click

Remote Management

to open the following screen.

Port

Figure 10-2 Remote Management

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 10-1 Remote Management

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Server Type Each of these labels denotes a service that you may use to remotely manage the Prestige.

Access Status Select the access interface. Choices are

All

,

LAN Only

,

WAN Only

and

Disable

.

This field shows the port number for the remote management service. You may change the port number for a service in this field, but you must use the same port number to use that service for remote management.

Secured Client

IP

Apply

Cancel

The default 0.0.0.0 allows any client to use this service to remotely manage the Prestige.

Type an IP address to restrict access to a client with a matching IP address.

Click

Apply

to save your settings back to the Prestige.

Click

Cancel

to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Remote Management Configuration 10-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 11

Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the web configurator.

11.1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play

Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peerto-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.

11.1.1 How do I know if I'm using UPnP?

UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.

11.1.2 NAT Traversal

UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

Dynamic port mapping

Learning public IP addresses

Assigning lease times to mappings

Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.

See the

Network Address Translation (NAT)

chapter for further information about NAT.

11.1.3 Cautions with UPnP

The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.

UPnP 11-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable

UPnP if this is not your intention.

11.2 UPnP and ZyXEL

ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum Creates UPnP™

Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports IGD 1.0 (Internet Gateway Device). At the time of writing ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Windows Messenger 4.6 and 4.7 while

Windows Messenger 5.0 and Xbox are still being tested.

UPnP broadcasts are only allowed on the LAN.

See later sections for examples of installing UPnP in Windows XP and Windows Me as well as an example of using UPnP in Windows.

11.2.1 Configuring UPnP

From the

Site Map

in the main menu, click

UPnP

under

Advanced Setup

to display the screen shown next.

Figure 11-1 Configuring UPnP

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 11-1 Configuring UPnP

LABEL

Enable the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Service

DESCRIPTION

Select this checkbox to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a

UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the Prestige's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator).

11-2 UPnP

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

LABEL

Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP

Table 11-1 Configuring UPnP

DESCRIPTION

Select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the Prestige so that they can communicate through the Prestige, for example by using NAT traversal, UPnP applications automatically reserve a

NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the

UPnP enabled application.

Click

Apply

to save the setting to the Prestige.

Click

Cancel

to return to the previously saved settings.

Apply

Cancel

11.3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example

This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP.

Installing UPnP in Windows Me

Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me.

Step 1.

Click

Start

and

Control Panel

. Double-click

Add/Remove

Programs

.

Step 2.

Click on the

Windows Setup

tab and select

Communication

in the

Components

selection box. Click

Details

.

UPnP 11-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Step 3.

In the

Communications

window, select the

Universal Plug and Play

check box in the

Components

selection box.

Step 4.

Click

OK

to go back to the

Add/Remove Programs

Properties

window and click

Next

.

Step 5.

Restart the computer when prompted.

Installing UPnP in Windows XP

Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP.

Step 1.

Click

Start

and

Control Panel

.

Step 2.

Double-click

Network Connections

.

Step 3.

In the

Network Connections

window, click

Advanced

in the main menu and select

Optional Networking Components

.

The

Windows Optional Networking

Components Wizard

window displays.

Step 4.

Select

Networking Service

in the

Components

selection box and click

Details

.

11-4 UPnP

Step 5.

In the

Networking Services

window, select the

Universal Plug and Play

check box.

Step 6.

Click

OK

to go back to the

Windows

Optional Networking Component

Wizard

window and click

Next

.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

11.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example

This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the Prestige.

Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Prestige. Turn on your computer and the Prestige.

Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device

Step 1.

Click

Start

and

Control Panel

. Double-click

Network Connections

. An icon displays under Internet Gateway.

Step 2.

Right-click the icon and select

Properties

.

UPnP 11-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Step 3.

In the

Internet Connection Properties

window, click

Settings

to see the port mappings there were automatically created.

Step 4.

You may edit or delete the port mappings or click

Add

to manually add port mappings.

When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically.

Step 5.

Select

Show icon in notification area when connected

option and click

OK

. An icon displays in the system tray

11-6 UPnP

Step 6.

Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Web Configurator Easy Access

With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the Prestige without finding out the IP address of the Prestige first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Prestige.

Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.

Step 1.

Click

Start

and then

Control Panel

.

Step 2.

Double-click

Network

Connections

.

Step 3.

Select

My Network Places

under

Other Places

.

UPnP 11-7

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Step 4.

An icon with the description for each

UPnP-enabled device displays under

Local Network

.

Step 5.

Right-click on the icon for your

Prestige and select

Invoke

. The web configurator login screen displays.

Step 6.

Right-click on the icon for your Prestige and select

Properties

. A properties window displays with basic information about the Prestige.

11-8 UPnP

Maintenance

Part V:

Maintenance

This part covers the maintenance screens.

V

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 12

Maintenance

This chapter displays system information such as ZyNOS firmware, port IP addresses and port traffic statistics.

12.1 Maintenance Overview

The maintenance screens can help you view system information, upload new firmware, manage configuration and restart your Prestige.

12.2 System Status Screen

Click

System Status

to open the following screen, where you can use to monitor your Prestige. Note that these fields are READ-ONLY and only for diagnostic purposes.

Maintenance 12-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 12-1 System Status

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

12-2 Maintenance

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

LABEL

Table 12-1 System Status

DESCRIPTION

System Status

System Name This is the name of your Prestige. It is for identification purposes.

ZyNOS Firmware Version

This is the ZyNOS firmware version and the date created. ZyNOS is ZyXEL's proprietary Network Operating System design.

DSL FW Version This is the DSL firmware version associated with your Prestige.

WAN Information

Standard This is the standard that your Prestige is using.

IP Address This is the WAN port IP address.

IP Subnet Mask This is the WAN port IP subnet mask.

Default Gateway This is the IP address of the default gateway, if applicable.

VPI/VCI This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the first Wizard screen.

LAN Information

MAC Address This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your

Prestige.

IP Address This is the LAN port IP address.

IP Subnet Mask This is the LAN port IP subnet mask.

DHCP This is the WAN port DHCP role -

None

.

Server

,

Relay

(not all Prestige models) or

DHCP Start IP This is the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.

DHCP Pool Size This is the number of IP addresses in the IP address pool.

Maintenance 12-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

LABEL

Show Statistics

Table 12-1 System Status

DESCRIPTION

Click

Show Statistics

to see the performance statistics such as number of packets sent and number of packets received for each port.

12.2.1 System Statistics

Click

Show Statistics

in the

System Status

screen to open the following screen. Read-only information here includes port status and packet specific statistics. Also provided are "system up time" and "poll interval(s)".

The

Poll Interval(s)

field is configurable.

Figure 12-2 System Status: Show Statistics

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

12-4 Maintenance

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

LABEL

System up Time

CPU Load

LAN or WAN Port

Statistics

Table 12-2 System Status: Show Statistics

DESCRIPTION

This is the elapsed time the system has been up.

This field specifies the percentage of CPU utilization.

This is the WAN or LAN port.

Link Status This is the status of your WAN link.

Upstream Speed This is the upstream speed of your Prestige.

Downstream Speed This is the downstream speed of your Prestige.

Node-Link This field displays the remote node index number and link type. Link types are PPPoA,

ENET, RFC 1483 and PPPoE.

Interface

Status

TxPkts

RxPkts

Errors

Tx B/s

Rx B/s

Up Time

Collisions

This field displays the type of port.

For the WAN port, this displays the port speed and duplex setting if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and

down

(line is down),

idle

(line (ppp) idle),

dial

(starting to trigger a call) and

drop

(dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation.

For a LAN port, this shows the port speed and duplex setting.

This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this port.

This field displays the number of packets received on this port.

This field displays the number of error packets on this port.

This field displays the number of bytes received in the last second.

This field displays the elapsed time this port has been up.

This is the number of collisions on this port.

Poll Interval(s) Type the time interval for the browser to refresh system statistics.

This field displays the number of bytes transmitted in the last second.

Maintenance 12-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

LABEL

Set Interval

Stop

Table 12-2 System Status: Show Statistics

DESCRIPTION

Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the

Poll Interval

field above.

Click this button to halt the refreshing of the system statistics.

12.3 DHCP Table Screen

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain

TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Prestige as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the Prestige provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If set to

None

,

DHCP service will be disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.

Click

Maintenance

, and then the

DHCP Table

tab. Read-only information here relates to your DHCP status.

The DHCP table shows current DHCP Client information (including

IP Address

,

Host Name

and

MAC

Address

) of all network clients using the DHCP server.

Figure 12-3 DHCP Table

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 12-3 DHCP Table

LABEL

Host Name This is the name of the host computer.

DESCRIPTION

IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the

Host Name

field.

12-6 Maintenance

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 12-3 DHCP Table

LABEL DESCRIPTION

MAC Address This field displays the MAC (Media Access Control) address of the computer with the displayed host name.

Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.

12.4 Diagnostic Screens

These read-only screens display information to help you identify problems with the Prestige.

12.4.1 Diagnostic General Screen

Click

Diagnostic

and then

General

to open the screen shown next.

Figure 12-4 Diagnostic General

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Maintenance 12-7

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

LABEL

TCP/IP

Address

Ping

Table 12-4 Diagnostic General

DESCRIPTION

Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection.

Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered.

Reset System

Click this button to reboot the Prestige. A warning dialog box is then displayed asking you if you're sure you want to reboot the system. Click

OK

to proceed.

Back Click this button to go back to the main

Diagnostic

screen.

12.4.2 Diagnostic DSL Line Screen

Click

Diagnostic

and then

DSL Line

to open the screen shown next.

Figure 12-5 Diagnostic DSL Line

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

12-8 Maintenance

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

LABEL

Reset ADSL

Line

Table 12-5 Diagnostic DSL Line

DESCRIPTION

Click this button to reinitialize the ADSL line. The large text box above then displays the progress and results of this operation, for example:

"Start to reset ADSL

Loading ADSL modem F/W...

Reset ADSL Line Successfully!"

ATM Status Click this button to view ATM status.

ATM Loopback

Test

Click this button to start the ATM loopback test. Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs/VCIs before you begin this test. The Prestige sends an OAM

F5 packet to the DSLAM/ATM switch and then returns it (loops it back) to the Prestige.

The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network.

Upstream Noise

Margin

Click this button to display the upstream noise margin.

Click this button to display the downstream noise margin. Downstream

Noise Margin

Back Click this button to go back to the main

Diagnostic

screen.

12.5 Firmware Screen

Find firmware at www.zyxel.com

in a file that (usually) uses the system model name with a "*.bin" extension, e.g., "Prestige.bin". The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. See the

Firmware and Configuration File

Maintenance

chapter in the parts that document the SMT for upgrading firmware using FTP/TFTP commands.

Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your device.

Click

Firmware

to open the following screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your Prestige.

Maintenance 12-9

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 12-6 Firmware Upgrade

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 12-6 Firmware Upgrade

LABEL DESCRIPTION

File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click

Browse ...

to find it.

Browse...

Click

Browse...

to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.

Upload Click

Upload

to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.

Reset Click this button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the Prestige to its factory defaults. Refer to the

Resetting the Prestige

section.

Do not turn off the Prestige while firmware upload is in progress!

After you see the

Firmware Upload in Process

screen, wait two minutes before logging into the Prestige again.

The Prestige automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.

12-10 Maintenance

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 12-7 Network Temporarily Disconnected

After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the

System Status

screen.

If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click

Back

to go back to the

Firmware

screen.

Figure 12-8 Error Message

Maintenance 12-11

SMT General Configuration

Part VI:

SMT General Configuration

This part covers System Management Terminal configuration for general setup, WAN backup, LAN setup, Internet access, remote node, static route and NAT.

See the web configurator parts of this guide for background information on features configurable by web configurator and SMT.

VI

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 13

Introducing the SMT

This chapter explains how to access and navigate the System Management Terminal and gives an overview of its menus.

13.1 SMT Introduction

T he Prestige’s SMT (System Management Terminal) is a menu-driven interface that you can access from a terminal emulator over a telnet connection. This chapter shows you how to access the SMT (System

Management Terminal) menus via Telnet, how to navigate the SMT and how to configure SMT menus.

13.1.1 Procedure for SMT Configuration via Telnet

The following procedure details how to telnet into your Prestige.

Step 1.

In Windows, click

Start

(usually in the bottom left corner),

Run

and then type “telnet

192.168.1.1” (the default IP address) and click

OK

.

Step 2.

Enter “1234” in the

Password

field.

Step 3.

After entering the password you will see the main menu.

Please note that if there is no activity for longer than five minutes (default timeout period) after you log in, your Prestige will automatically log you out. You will then have to telnet into the Prestige again.

13.1.2 Entering Password

The login screen appears after you press

[ENTER]

, prompting you to enter the password, as shown next.

For your first login, enter the default password “1234”. As you type the password, the screen displays an asterisk “*” for each character you type.

Please note that if there is no activity for longer than five minutes after you log in, your Prestige will automatically log you out.

Enter Password : ****

Figure 13-1 Login Screen

Introducing the SMT 13-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

13.1.3 Prestige SMT Menu Overview

The following figure gives you an overview of the various SMT menu screens of your Prestige.

Prestige 660R

Main Menu

Menu 1

General Setup

Menu 2

WAN Backup Setup

Menu 1.1

Configure Dynamic

DNS

Menu 2.1

Traffic Redirect

Setup

Menu 3

LAN Setup

Menu 3.1

LAN Port Filter

Setup

Menu 3.2

TCP/IP and DHCP

Setup

Menu 3.2.1

IP Alias Setup

Menu 4

Internet Access

Setup

Menu 11

Remote Node Setup

Menu 12

Static Routing Setup

Menu 15

NAT Setup

Menu 11.1

Remote Node Profile

Menu 12.1

IP Static Route

Menu 11.3

Remote Node Network

Layer Options

Menu 12.3

Bridge Static Route

Menu 12.1.1

Edit IP Static Route

Menu 15.1

Address Mapping Sets

Menu 15.1.x

Address Mapping Rules

Menu 12.3.1

Edit Bridge Static

Route

Menu 15.2

NAT Server Sets

Menu 15.1.x.x

Address Mapping Rule

Menu 11.5

Remote Node Filter

Menu 15.2.x

NAT Server Setup

Menu 11.6

Remote Node ATM

Layer Options

Menu 11.8

Advance Setup

Options

Menu 26

Schedule Setup

Menu 26.x

Schedule Set Setup

Menu 25.1.1

IP Routing Policy

Menu 25

IP Routing Policy

Setup

Menu 24

System Maintenance

Menu 25.1

IP Routing Policy

Setup

Menu 24.1

System Maintenance --

Status

Menu 23

System Password

Menu 22

SNMP Configuration

Menu 21

Filter Set Configuration

Menu 21.x

Filter Rules Summary

Menu 24.11

Remote Management

Menu 24.10

Time and Date

Setting

Menu 24.9.1

Budget Management

Menu 24.2.2

System Maintenance --

Change Console Port Spee d

Menu 24.2

System Information and

Console port Speed

Menu 24.2.1

System Maintenance --

Information

Menu 24.9

Call Control

Menu 24.8

Command Interpreter

Mode

Menu 24.3

System Maintenance --

Log and Trace

Menu 24.3.1

System Maintenance --

View Error Log

Menu 24.3.2

System Maintenance --

UNIX Syslog

Menu 21.x.1

TCP/IP Filter Rule

Menu 21.x.1

Generic Filter Rule

Menu 24.7.2

System Maintenance --

Upload System

Configuration File

Menu 24.7.1

System Maintenance --

Upload System Firmware

Menu 24.7

System Maintenance --

Upload Firmware

Menu 24.4

System Maintenance --

Diagnostic

Menu 24.6

System Maintenance --

Restore Configuration

Menu 24.5

System Maintenance --

Backup Configuration

Figure 13-2 Prestige 660R SMT Menu Overview

13-2 Introducing the SMT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

13.2 Navigating the SMT Interface

The SMT (System Management Terminal) is the interface that you use to configure your Prestige.

Several operations that you should be familiar with before you attempt to modify the configuration are listed in the table below.

Table 13-1 Main Menu Commands

OPERATION KEYSTROKE

Move down to another menu

[ENTER]

DESCRIPTION

To move forward to a submenu, type in the number of the desired submenu and press [ENTER].

Move up to a previous menu

[ESC] Press [ESC] to move back to the previous menu.

Move to a “hidden” menu

Press [SPACE

BAR] to change

No

to

Yes

then press

[ENTER].

Fields beginning with “Edit” lead to hidden menus and have a default setting of

No

. Press [SPACE BAR] once to change

No

to

Yes

, then press [ENTER] to go to the “hidden” menu.

Move the cursor [ENTER] or

[UP]/[DOWN] arrow keys.

Within a menu, press [ENTER] to move to the next field. You can also use the [UP]/[DOWN] arrow keys to move to the previous and the next field, respectively.

Entering information

Required fields

N/A fields

Type in or press

[SPACE BAR], then press [ENTER].

You need to fill in two types of fields. The first requires you to type in the appropriate information. The second allows you to cycle through the available choices by pressing [SPACE BAR].

<

?

> or

ChangeMe

All fields with the symbol <?> must be filled in order to be able to save the new configuration.

<N/A>

All fields with

ChangeMe

must not be left blank in order to be able to save the new configuration.

Some of the fields in the SMT will show a <N/A>. This symbol refers to an option that is Not Applicable.

Save your configuration

Exit the SMT

[ENTER] Save your configuration by pressing [ENTER] at the message

“Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel”. Saving the data on the screen will take you, in most cases to the previous menu.

Type 99, then press

[ENTER].

Type 99 at the main menu prompt and press [ENTER] to exit the

SMT interface.

After you enter the password, the SMT displays the main menu, as shown next.

Introducing the SMT 13-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Copyright (c) 1994 - 2004 ZyXEL Communications Corp.

Prestige 660R-61 Main Menu

Getting Started Advanced Management

1. General Setup 21. Filter Set Configuration

2. WAN Backup Setup 22. SNMP Configuration

3. LAN Setup 23. System Password

4. Internet Access Setup 24. System Maintenance

25. IP Routing Policy Setup

Advanced Applications 26. Schedule Setup

11. Remote Node Setup

12. Static Routing Setup

15. NAT Setup 99. Exit

Enter Menu Selection Number:

Figure 13-3 SMT Main Menu

13.2.1 System Management Terminal Interface Summary

Table 13-2 Main Menu Summary

1

2

3

General Setup

WAN Backup Setup

LAN Setup

4 Internet Access Setup

11 Remote Node Setup

12 Static Routing Setup

15 NAT Setup

21 Filter Set Configuration

22 SNMP Configuration

23 System Password

24 System Maintenance

25 IP Routing Policy Setup

DESCRIPTION

Use this menu to set up your general information.

Use this menu to setup traffic redirect.

Use this menu to set up your LAN connection.

A quick and easy way to set up an Internet connection.

Use this menu to set up the Remote Node for LAN-to-LAN connection, including Internet connection.

Use this menu to set up static routes.

Use this menu to specify inside servers when NAT is enabled.

Use this menu to configure filters.

Use this menu to set up SNMP related parameters.

Use this menu to change your password.

This menu provides system status, diagnostics, software upload, etc.

Use this menu to configure your IP routing policy.

13-4 Introducing the SMT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

26 Schedule Setup

99 Exit

Table 13-2 Main Menu Summary

DESCRIPTION

Use this menu to schedule outgoing calls.

Use this to exit from SMT and return to a blank screen.

13.3 Changing the System Password

Change the Prestige default password by following the steps shown next.

Step 1.

Enter 23 in the main menu to display

Menu 23 - System Password

as shown next.

Step 2.

Type your existing system password in the

Old Password

field, for example “1234”, and press

[ENTER]

.

Menu 23 - System Password

Old Password= ?

New Password= ?

Retype to confirm= ?

Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

Figure 13-4 Menu 23.1 Change Password

Step 3.

Type your new system password in the

New Password

field (up to 30 characters), and press

[ENTER] .

Step 4.

Re-type your new system password in the

Retype to confirm

field for confirmation and press

[ENTER] .

Note that as you type a password, the screen displays an “*” for each character you type.

Introducing the SMT 13-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 14

Menu 1 General Setup

Menu 1 - General Setup

contains administrative and system-related information.

14.1 General Setup

Menu 1 — General Setup

contains administrative and system-related information (shown next). The

System Name

field is for identification purposes. However, because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer's "Computer Name".

In Windows 95/98 click

Start

,

Settings

,

Control Panel

,

Network

. Click the

Identification

tab, note the entry for the

Computer name

field and enter it as the Prestige

System Name

.

In Windows 2000 click

Start

,

Settings

,

Control Panel

and then double-click

System

. Click the

Network Identification

tab and then the

Properties

button. Note the entry for the

Computer name

field and enter it as the Prestige

System Name

.

In Windows XP, click

start

,

My Computer

,

View system information

and then click the

Computer Name

tab. Note the entry in the

Full computer name

field and enter it as the Prestige

System Name

.

The

Domain Name

entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN. If you leave this blank, the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used. While you must enter the host name (System Name) on each individual computer, the domain name can be assigned from the Prestige via DHCP.

14.2 Procedure To Configure Menu 1

Step 1.

Enter 1 in the Main Menu to open

Menu 1

General Setup

(shown next).

Menu 1 General Setup 14-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 1 - General Setup

System Name= ?

Location=

Contact Person's Name=

Domain Name=

Edit Dynamic DNS= No

Route IP= Yes

Bridge= No

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 14-1 Menu 1 General Setup

Step 2.

Fill in the required fields. Refer to the table shown next for more information about these fields.

Table 14-1 Menu 1 General Setup

System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes. This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes “-” and underscores "_" are accepted.

Location (optional) Enter the geographic location (up to 31 characters) of your Prestige

.

MyHouse

Contact Person's

Name (optional)

Enter the name (up to 30 characters) of the person in charge of this

Prestige.

JohnDoe

Domain Name Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP. You can go to menu 24.8 and type "sys domainname" to see the current domain name used by your gateway. zyxel.com.tw

If you want to clear this field just press the [SPACE BAR]. The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name.

Edit Dynamic DNS Press the [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes

or

No

(default). Select

Yes

to configure

Menu 1.1 — Configure Dynamic DNS

(discussed next).

Route IP Set this field to

Yes

to enable or

No

to disable IP routing. You must enable IP routing for Internet access.

No

Yes

Bridge Turn on/off bridging for protocols not supported (for example, SNA) or not turned on in the previous

Route IP

field. Select

Yes

to turn bridging on; select

No

to turn bridging off.

No

14-2 Menu 1 General Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

14.2.1 Procedure to Configure Dynamic DNS

If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.

Step 1.

To configure Dynamic DNS, go to

Menu 1 — General Setup

and select

Yes

in the

Edit

Dynamic DNS

field. Press [

ENTER

] to display

Menu 1.1— Configure Dynamic DNS

as shown next.

Menu 1.1 - Configure Dynamic DNS

Service Provider = WWW.DynDNS.ORG

Active= Yes

Host= me.dyndns.org

EMAIL= mail@mailserver

USER= username

Password= *********

Enable Wildcard= No

Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel:

Figure 14-2 Menu 1.1 Configure Dynamic DNS

Follow the instructions in the next table to configure Dynamic DNS parameters.

Table 14-2 Menu 1.1 Configure Dynamic DNS

FIELD DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE

Service Provider This is the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider.

Active

WWW.DynDNS.ORG

(default)

Yes

Host

EMAIL

USER

Press [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes

and then press [ENTER] to make dynamic DNS active.

Enter the domain name assigned to your Prestige by your

Dynamic DNS provider.

Enter your e-mail address.

Enter your user name. me.dyndns.org mail@mailserver

Password Enter the password assigned to you.

Enable Wildcard Your Prestige supports DYNDNS Wildcard. Press [SPACE

BAR] and then [ENTER] to select

Yes

or

No

This field is

N/A

when you choose DDNS client as your service provider.

No

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to Confirm…” to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel.

Menu 1 General Setup 14-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 15

Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup

This chapter describes how to configure traffic redirect using menu 2 and 2.1.

15.1 Introduction to WAN Backup Setup

This chapter explains how to configure the Prestige for traffic redirect.

15.2 Configuring Dial Backup in Menu 2

From the main menu, enter 2 to open menu 2.

Menu 2 - Wan Backup Setup

Check Mechanism = DSL Link

Check WAN IP Address1 = 0.0.0.0

Check WAN IP Address2 = 0.0.0.0

Check WAN IP Address3 = 0.0.0.0

KeepAlive Fail Tolerance = 0

Recovery Interval(sec) = 0

ICMP Timeout(sec) = 0

Traffic Redirect = No

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Press Space Bar to Toggle.

Figure 15-1 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup

The following table describes the fields in this menu.

FIELD

Check Mechanism

Table 15-1 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup

DESCRIPTION

Press [SPACE BAR] and then press [ENTER] to select the method that the Prestige uses to check the DSL connection.

Select

DSL Link

to have the Prestige check the DSL connection’s physical layer.

Select

ICMP

to have the Prestige periodically ping the IP addresses configured in the

Check WAN IP Address

fields.

Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup 15-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 15-1 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup

FIELD

Check WAN IP

Address1-3

KeepAlive Fail

Tolerance

DESCRIPTION

Configure this field to test your Prestige's WAN accessibility. Type the IP address of a reliable nearby computer (for example, your ISP's DNS server address).

When using a WAN backup connection, the Prestige periodically pings the addresses configured here and uses the other WAN backup connection (if configured) if there is no response.

Type the number of times (2 recommended) that your Prestige may ping the IP addresses configured in the

Check WAN IP Address

field without getting a response before switching to a WAN backup connection (or a different WAN backup connection).

Recovery

Interval(sec)

ICMP Timeout

Traffic Redirect

When the Prestige is using a lower priority connection (usually a WAN backup connection), it periodically checks to whether or not it can use a higher priority connection.

Type the number of seconds (30 recommended) for the Prestige to wait between checks. Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic.

Type the number of seconds for an ICMP session to wait for the ICMP response.

Press [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes

or

No

.

Select

Yes

and press [ENTER] to configure

Menu 2.1 Traffic Redirect Setup

.

Select

No

(default) if you do not want to configure this feature.

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to Confirm…” to save your configuration, or press [ESC] at any time to cancel.

15.2.1 Traffic Redirect Setup

Configure parameters that determine when the Prestige will forward WAN traffic to the backup gateway using

Menu 2.1 — Traffic Redirect Setup

.

15-2 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 2.1 - Traffic Redirect Setup

Active= No

Configuration:

Backup Gateway IP Address= 0.0.0.0

Metric= 15

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 15-2 Menu 2.1Traffic Redirect Setup

The following table describes the fields in this menu.

Table 15-2 Menu 2.1Traffic Redirect Setup

FIELD

Active

DESCRIPTION

Press [SPACE BAR] and select

Yes

(to enable) or

No

(to disable) traffic redirect setup.

The default is

No

.

Configuration:

Backup

Gateway IP

Address

Enter the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation.

The Prestige automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the Prestige’s Internet connection terminates.

Metric This field sets this route's priority among the routes the Prestige uses.

The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of "1" for directly connected networks. The number must be between "1" and "15"; a number greater than "15" means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the "cost".

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press [ENTER] to confirm or [ESC] to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup 15-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 16

Menu 3 LAN Setup

This chapter covers how to configure your wired Local Area Network (LAN) settings.

16.1 LAN Setup

This section describes how to configure the Ethernet using

Menu 3

LAN Setup

. From the main menu, enter 3 to display menu 3.

Menu 3 - LAN Setup

1. LAN Port Filter Setup

2. TCP/IP and DHCP Setup

Enter Menu Selection Number:

Figure 16-1 Menu 3 LAN Setup

16.1.1 General Ethernet Setup

This menu allows you to specify filter set(s) that you wish to apply to the Ethernet traffic. You seldom need to filter Ethernet traffic; however, the filter sets may be useful to block certain packets, reduce traffic and prevent security breaches.

Menu 3 LAN Setup 16-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 3.1 - LAN Port Filter Setup

Input Filter Sets:

protocol filters=

device filters=

Output Filter Sets:

protocol filters=

device filters=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 16-2 Menu 3.1 LAN Port Filter Setup

If you need to define filters, please read the

Filter Set Configuration

chapter first, then return to this menu to define the filter sets.

16.2 Protocol Dependent Ethernet Setup

Depending on the protocols for your applications, you need to configure the respective Ethernet Setup, as outlined below.

For TCP/IP Ethernet setup refer to the

Internet Access Application

chapter.

For bridging Ethernet setup refer to the

Bridging Setup

chapter

.

16.3 TCP/IP Ethernet Setup and DHCP

Use menu 3.2 to configure your Prestige for TCP/IP.

To edit menu 3.2, enter 3 from the main menu to display

Menu 3 — LAN Setup

. When menu 3 appears, press 2 and press [ENTER] to display

Menu 3.2 — TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup

, as shown next

:

16-2 Menu 3 LAN Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 3.2 - TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup

DHCP Setup:

DHCP= Server

Client IP Pool Starting Address= 192.168.1.33

Size of Client IP Pool= 32

Primary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0

Secondary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0

Remote DHCP Server= N/A

TCP/IP Setup:

IP Address= 192.68.1.1

IP Subnet Mask= 255.255.255.0

RIP Direction= Both

Version= RIP-1

Multicast= None

IP Policies=

Edit IP Alias= No

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Press Space Bar to Toggle.

Figure 16-3 Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup

Follow the instructions in the following table on how to configure the DHCP fields.

Table 16-1 DHCP Ethernet Setup

First address in the IP pool

Size of the IP

Pool

IP addresses of the DNS servers

This is the IP address of the

Prestige

DHCP Setup

DHCP If set to

Server

, your Prestige can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95, Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client.

If set to

None

, the DHCP server will be disabled.

If set to

Relay

, the Prestige acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. Enter the IP address of the actual, remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server in this case.

When DHCP is used, the following items need to be set:

Client IP Pool Starting

Address

This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.

Size of Client IP Pool This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool.

Primary DNS Server

Secondary DNS

Server

Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers. The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask.

Server

32

(default)

192.168.1.33

Menu 3 LAN Setup 16-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 16-1 DHCP Ethernet Setup

Remote DHCP Server If

Relay

is selected in the

DHCP

field above then enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server here.

Follow the instructions in the following table to configure TCP/IP parameters for the Ethernet port.

Table 16-2 TCP/IP Ethernet Setup

TCP/IP Setup

IP Address Enter the (LAN) IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation

IP Subnet Mask Your Prestige will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the Prestige.

RIP Direction Press [ SPACE BAR

] to select the RIP direction. Choices are

Both

,

In Only

,

Out Only

or

None

.

Version

Multicast

IP Policies

Edit IP Alias

Press [

SPACE BAR]

to select the RIP version. Choices are

RIP-1

,

RIP-2B

or

RIP-2M

.

IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group. The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 (

IGMP-v1

) and version 2 (

IGMP-v2

).

Press the [

SPACE BAR]

to enable IP Multicasting or select

None

to disable it.

Create policies using SMT menu 25 (see the

IP Policy Routing chapter

) and apply them on the Prestige LAN interface here. You can apply up to four IP Policy sets (from twelve) by entering their numbers separated by commas.

The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network. Press [

SPACE BAR

] to change

No

to

Yes

and press [

ENTER

] to display menu 3.2.1.

192.168.1.1

255.255.255.0

Both

(default)

RIP-1

(default)

None

(default)

2,4,7,9

No

(default)

16-4 Menu 3 LAN Setup

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 17

Internet Access

This chapter shows you how to configure the LAN and WAN of your Prestige for Internet access

.

17.1 Internet Access Overview

Refer to the chapters on the web configurator’s wizard, LAN and WAN screens for more background information on fields in the SMT screens covered in this chapter.

17.2 IP Policies

Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address

only

and the router takes the shortest path to forward a packet. IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis, prior to the normal routing. Create policies using SMT menu 25 (see

IP Policy Routing

) and apply them on the Prestige LAN and/or WAN interfaces using menus 3.2 (LAN) and 11.3 (WAN).

17.3 IP Alias

IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network.

Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap.

The following figure shows a LAN divided into subnets A, B, and C.

Internet Access 17-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 17-1 Physical Network Figure 17-2 Partitioned Logical Networks

Use menu 3.2.1 to configure IP Alias on your Prestige.

17.4 IP Alias Setup

Use menu 3.2 to configure the first network. Move the cursor to

Edit IP Alias

field and press [ SPACEBAR] to choose

Yes

and press [ENTER] to configure the second and third network.

Menu 3.2 - TCP/IP and DHCP Setup

DHCP Setup:

DHCP= Server

Client IP Pool Starting Addres= 192.168.1.33

Size of Client IP Pool= 32

Primary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0

Secondary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0

Remote DHCP Server= N/A

TCP/IP Setup:

IP Address= 192.168.1.1

IP Subnet Mask= 255.255.255.0

RIP Direction= None

Version= N/A

Multicast= None

IP Policies=

Edit IP Alias= Yes

Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Press Space Bar to Toggle.

Figure 17-3 Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Setup

Pressing [ ENTER ] displays

Menu 3.2.1 — IP Alias Setup

, as shown next.

17-2

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 3.2.1 - IP Alias Setup

IP Alias 1= No

IP Address= N/A

IP Subnet Mask= N/A

RIP Direction= N/A

Version= N/A

Incoming protocol filters= N/A

Outgoing protocol filters= N/A

IP Alias 2= No

IP Address= N/A

IP Subnet Mask= N/A

RIP Direction= N/A

Version= N/A

Incoming protocol filters= N/A

Outgoing protocol filters= N/A

Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

Figure 17-4 Menu 3.2.1 IP Alias Setup

Follow the instructions in the following table to configure IP Alias parameters.

Table 17-1 Menu 3.2.1 IP Alias Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE

IP Alias Choose

Yes

to configure the LAN network for the Prestige.

Yes

IP Address

IP Subnet

Mask

Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation

Your Prestige will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the

IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the Prestige

192.168.2.1

255.255.255.0

None

RIP Direction

Press [

SPACE BAR

] to select the RIP direction. Choices are

None

,

Both

,

In Only

or

Out Only

.

Version

Press [

SPACE BAR]

RIP-2B

or

RIP-2M

.

to select the RIP version. Choices are

RIP-1

,

RIP-1

Incoming

Protocol Filters

Enter the filter set(s) you wish to apply to the incoming traffic between this node and the Prestige.

Outgoing

Protocol Filters

Enter the filter set(s) you wish to apply to the outgoing traffic between this node and the Prestige.

When you have completed this menu, press [

ENTER

] at the prompt “Press ENTER to Confirm…” to save your configuration, or press [

ESC

] at any time to cancel.

Internet Access 17-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

17.5 Route IP Setup

The first step is to enable the IP routing in

Menu 1 — General Setup

.

To edit menu 1, type 1 in the main menu and press [ ENTER ]. Set the

Route IP

field to

Yes

by pressing

[

SPACE BAR

].

Menu 1 - General Setup

System Name= ?

Location= location

Contact Person's Name=

Domain Name=

Edit Dynamic DNS= No

Route IP= Yes

Bridge= No

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 17-5 Menu 1 General Setup

17.6 Internet Access Configuration

Menu 4 allows you to enter the Internet Access information in one screen. Menu 4 is actually a simplified setup for one of the remote nodes that you can access in menu 11. Before you configure your Prestige for

Internet access, you need to collect your Internet account information.

Use the

Internet Account Information

table in the

Read Me First

to record your Internet account information.

Note that if you are using PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation, then the only ISP information you need is a login name and password. You only need to know the Ethernet Encapsulation Gateway IP address if you are using

ENET ENCAP encapsulation.

From the main menu, type 4 to display

Menu 4 - Internet Access Setup

, as shown next.

17-4

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 4 - Internet Access Setup

ISP's Name= MyIsp

Encapsulation= ENET ENCAP

Multiplexing= LLC-based

VPI #= 8

VCI #= 32

ATM QoS Type= UBR

Peak Cell Rate (PCR)= 0

Sustain Cell Rate (SCR)= 0

Maximum Burst Size (MBS)= 0

My Login= N/A

My Password= N/A

ENET ENCAP Gateway= N/A

IP Address Assignment= Dynamic

IP Address= N/A

Network Address Translation= SUA Only

Address Mapping Set= N/A

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 17-6 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup

The following table contains instructions on how to configure your Prestige for Internet access.

Table 17-2 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup

ISP’s Name

Encapsulation

Multiplexing

Enter the name of your Internet Service Provider. This information is for identification purposes only.

Press [

SPACE BAR

] to select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP. Choices are

PPPoE

,

PPPoA

,

RFC 1483

or

ENET ENCAP

.

Press [

SPACE BAR

] to select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP. Choices are

VC-based

or

LLC-based

.

Enter the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) assigned to you.

Enter the Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) assigned to you.

VPI #

VCI #

ATM QoS Type Press [SPACE BAR] and select

CBR

(Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth. Select

UBR

(Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select

VBR

(Variable Bit Rate) for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications.

Peak Cell Rate

(PCR)

This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR.

MyIsp

ENET ENCAP

LLC-based

8

32

UBR

0

Internet Access 17-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 17-2 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup

Sustain Cell

Rate (SCR)= 0

Maximum Burst

Size (MBS)= 0

Sustained Cell Rate is the mean cell rate of a bursty, on-off traffic source that can be sent at the peak rate, and a parameter for bursttraffic. Type the SCR; it must be less than the PCR.

Refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS. The MBS must be less than 65535.

0

0

My Login

My Password

ENET ENCAP

Gateway

Idle Timeout

Configure the

My Login

and

My Password

fields for PPPoA and

PPPoE encapsulation only. Enter the login name that your ISP gives you. If you are using PPPoE encapsulation

,

then this field must be of the form user@domain where domain identifies your PPPoE service name.

Enter the password associated with the login name above.

Enter the gateway IP address supplied by your ISP when you are using

ENET ENCAP

encapsulation.

This value specifies the number of idle seconds that elapse before the Prestige automatically disconnects the PPPoE session.

IP Address

Assignment

Press [

SPACE BAR

] to select

Static

or

Dynamic

address assignment.

IP Address Enter the IP address supplied by your ISP if applicable.

N/A

N/A

N/A

0

Dynamic

Network

Address

Translation

Press [

SPACE BAR

] to select

None

,

SUA Only

or

Full Feature

.

Please see the

NAT Chapter

for more details on the SUA (Single

User Account) feature.

N/A

SUA Only

Address

Mapping Set

Type the numbers of mapping sets (1-8) to use with NAT. See the

NAT

chapter for details.

N/A

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

If all your settings are correct your Prestige should connect automatically to the Internet. If the connection fails, note the error message that you receive on the screen and take the appropriate troubleshooting steps.

17-6

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 18

Remote Node Configuration

This chapter covers remote node configuration.

18.1 Remote Node Setup Overview

This section describes the protocol-independent parameters for a remote node. A remote node is required for placing calls to a remote gateway. A remote node represents both the remote gateway and the network behind it across a WAN connection. When you use menu 4 to set up Internet access, you are configuring one of the remote nodes.

You first choose a remote node in

Menu 11- Remote Node Setup

. You can then edit that node’s profile in menu 11.1, as well as configure specific settings in three submenus: edit IP and bridge options in menu 11.3; edit ATM options in menu 11.6; and edit filter sets in menu 11.5.

18.2 Remote Node Setup

This section describes the protocol-independent parameters for a remote node.

18.2.1 Remote Node Profile

To configure a remote node, follow these steps:

Step 1.

From the main menu, enter 11 to display

Menu 11 - Remote Node Setup.

Step 2.

When menu 11 appears, as shown in the following figure, type the number of the remote node that you want to configure.

Remote Node Configuration 18-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 11 - Remote Node Setup

1. MyISP (ISP, NAT)

2. ________

3. ________

4. ________

5. ________

6. ________

7. ________

8. ________

Enter Node # to Edit:

Figure 18-1 Menu 11 Remote Node Setup

18.2.2 Encapsulation and Multiplexing Scenarios

For Internet access you should use the encapsulation and multiplexing methods used by your ISP. Consult your telephone company for information on encapsulation and multiplexing methods for LAN-to-LAN applications, for example between a branch office and corporate headquarters. There must be prior agreement on encapsulation and multiplexing methods because they cannot be automatically determined. What method(s) you use also depends on how many VCs you have and how many different network protocols you need. The extra overhead that ENET ENCAP encapsulation entails makes it a poor choice in a LAN-to-LAN application. Here are some examples of more suitable combinations in such an application.

Scenario 1. One VC, Multiple Protocols

PPPoA

(RFC-2364) encapsulation with

VC-based

multiplexing is the best combination because no extra protocol identifying headers are needed. The

PPP

protocol already contains this information.

Scenario 2. One VC, One Protocol (IP)

Selecting

RFC-1483

encapsulation with

VC-based

multiplexing requires the least amount of overhead (0 octets). However, if there is a potential need for multiple protocol support in the future, it may be safer to select

PPPoA

encapsulation instead of

RFC-1483

, so you do not need to reconfigure either computer later.

Scenario 3. Multiple VCs

If you have an equal number (or more) of VCs than the number of protocols, then select

RFC-1483

encapsulation and

VC-based

multiplexing.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 11.1 - Remote Node Profile

Rem Node Name= MyIsp Route= IP

Active= Yes Bridge= No

Encapsulation= ENET ENCAP Edit IP/Bridge= No

Multiplexing= LLC-based Edit ATM Options= No

Service Name= N/A Edit Advance Options= N/A

Incoming: Telco Option:

Rem Login= N/A Allocated Budget(min)= N/A

Rem Password= N/A Period(hr)= N/A

Outgoing: Schedule Sets= N/A

My Login= N/A Nailed-Up Connection= N/A

My Password= N/A Session Options:

Authen= N/A Edit Filter Sets= No

Idle Timeout(sec)= N/A

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Edit IP/Bridge Options in menu 11.3.

Edit ATM Options in menu 11.6

Edit Filter Sets in menu 11.5.

Figure 18-2 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile

In

Menu 11.1 – Remote Node Profile

, fill in the fields as described in the following table.

Table 18-1 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile

Rem Node Name Type a unique, descriptive name of up to eight characters for this node.

Active Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select

Yes

to activate or

No

to deactivate this node. Inactive nodes are displayed with a minus sign

“–“ in SMT menu 11.

Encapsulation

PPPoA

refers to RFC-2364 (PPP Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation

Layer 5).

If RFC-1483 (Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer

5) of

ENET ENCAP

are selected, then the

Rem Login

,

Rem Password

,

My Login

,

My Password

and

Authen

fields are not applicable (

N/A

).

Multiplexing

Service Name

Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select the method of multiplexing that your ISP uses, either

VC-based

or

LLC-based

.

When using

PPPoE

encapsulation, type the name of your PPPoE service here.

Incoming:

MyIsp

Yes

ENET

ENCAP

N/A

LLC-based

Remote Node Configuration 18-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 18-1 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile

Rem Login Type the login name that this remote node will use to call your

Prestige. The login name and the

Rem Password

will be used to authenticate this node.

Rem Password Type the password used when this remote node calls your Prestige.

Outgoing:

My Login Type the login name assigned by your ISP when the Prestige calls this remote node.

My Password Type the password assigned by your ISP when the Prestige calls this remote node.

Authen This field sets the authentication protocol used for outgoing calls.

Options for this field are:

Route

Bridge

CHAP

/

PAP

– Your Prestige will accept either

CHAP

or

PAP

when requested by this remote node.

CHAP

– accept

CHAP

(Challenge Handshake Authentication

Protocol) only.

PAP

– accept PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) only.

This field determines the protocol used in routing. Options are

IP

and

None.

When bridging is enabled, your Prestige will forward any packet that it does not route to this remote node; otherwise, the packets are discarded. Select

Yes

to enable and

No

to disable.

Edit IP/Bridge Press [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes

and press [ENTER] to display

Menu 11.3 – Remote Node Network Layer Options

.

Edit ATM Options

Press [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes

and press [ENTER] to display

Menu 11.6 – Remote Node ATM Layer Options

.

Edit Advance

Options

Telco Option

This field is only available when you select

PPPoE

in the

Encapsulation

field.

Press [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes

and press [ENTER] to display

Menu 11.8 – Advance Setup Options

.

IP

No

No

No

No

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 18-1 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile

Allocated Budget

(min)

This sets a ceiling for outgoing call time for this remote node. The default for this field is 0 meaning no budget control.

Period (hr) This field is the time period that the budget should be reset. For example, if we are allowed to call this remote node for a maximum of

10 minutes every hour, then the

Allocated Budget

is (10 minutes) and the

Period (hr)

is 1 (hour).

Schedule Sets This field is only applicable for

PPPoE

and

PPPoA

encapsulation. You can apply up to four schedule sets here. For more details please refer to the

Call Schedule Setup

chapter.

Nailed up

Connection

This field is only applicable for section.

PPPoE

and

PPPoA

encapsulation.

This field specifies if you want to make the connection to this remote node a nailed-up connection. More details are given earlier in this

Session Options

Edit Filter Sets Use [SPACE BAR] to choose

Yes

and press [ENTER] to open menu

11.5 to edit the filter sets. See the

Remote Node Filter

section for more details.

Idle Timeout (sec) Type the number of seconds (0-9999) that can elapse when the

Prestige is idle (there is no traffic going to the remote node), before the

Prestige automatically disconnects the remote node. 0 means that the session will not timeout.

No

(default)

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

18.2.3 Outgoing Authentication Protocol

For obvious reasons, you should employ the strongest authentication protocol possible. However, some vendors’ implementation includes specific authentication protocol in the user profile. It will disconnect if the negotiated protocol is different from that in the user profile, even when the negotiated protocol is stronger than specified. If the peer disconnects right after a successful authentication, make sure that you specify the correct authentication protocol when connecting to such an implementation.

Remote Node Configuration 18-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

18.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options

For the TCP/IP parameters, perform the following steps to edit

Menu 11.3 – Remote Node Network Layer

Options

as shown next.

Step 1.

In menu 11.1, make sure

IP

is among the protocols in the

Route

field.

Step 2.

Move the cursor to the

Edit IP/Bridge

field, press [ SPACE BAR ] to select

Yes,

then press

[ENTER] to display

Menu 11.3

Remote Node Network Layer Options.

Menu 11.3 - Remote Node Network Layer Options

IP Options: Bridge Options:

IP Address Assignment=

Dynamic

Ethernet Addr Timeout (min)= N/A

Rem IP Addr: 0.0.0.0

Rem Subnet Mask= 0.0.0.0

My WAN Addr= N/A

NAT= Full Feature

Address Mapping Set= 2

Metric= 2

Private= No

RIP Direction= None

Version= RIP-1

Multicast= None

IP Policies= 3,4,5,6

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 18-3 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options

The next table explains fields in

Menu 11.3

Remote Node Network Layer Options

.

Table 18-2 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options

IP Address

Assignment

Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select

Dynamic

if the remote node is using a dynamically assigned IP address or

Static

if it is using a static (fixed) IP address. You will only be able to configure this in the ISP node (also the one you configure in menu 4), all other nodes are set to

Static

.

Rem IP Addr This is the IP address you entered in the previous menu.

Rem Subnet

Mask

Type the subnet mask assigned to the remote node.

Dynamic

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 18-2 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options

My WAN

Addr

NAT

Some implementations, especially UNIX derivatives, require separate IP network numbers for the WAN and LAN links and each end to have a unique address within the WAN network number. In that case, type the IP address assigned to the WAN port of your Prestige.

NOTE: Refers to local Prestige address, not the remote router address.

Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select

Full Feature

if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige.

Select

SUA Only

if you have just one public WAN IP address for your

Prestige. The SMT uses Address Mapping Set 255 (menu 15.1 - see section

21.3.1

).

Select

None

to disable NAT.

Address

Mapping Set

Metric

Private

When

Full Feature

is selected in the

NAT

field, configure address mapping sets in menu 15.1. Select one of the NAT server sets (2-10) in menu 15.2 (see the

NAT

chapter for details) and type that number here.

When

SUA Only

is selected in the NAT field, the SMT uses NAT server set

1 in menu 15.2 (see the

NAT

chapter for details).

The metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the cost measurement, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Type a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and

15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.

This determines if the Prestige will include the route to this remote node in its RIP broadcasts. If set to

Yes

, this route is kept private and not included in RIP broadcast. If

No

, the route to this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts.

Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select the RIP Direction.

Options are

Both

,

In Only

,

Out Only

or

None

.

RIP

Direction

Version Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select the RIP version. Options are

RIP-1

,

RIP-2B

or

RIP-2M

.

Multicast

IGMP-v1

sets IGMP to version 1,

None

disables IGMP.

IGMP-v2

sets IGMP to version 2 and

IP Policies You can apply up to four IP Policy sets (from 12) by typing in their numbers separated by commas. Configure the filter sets in menu 25 first (see the

IP

Policy Routing

chapter) and then apply them here.

SUA Only

2

2

No

None

RIP-1

None

3, 4, 5, 6

Remote Node Configuration 18-7

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 18-2 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

18.3.1 My WAN Addr Sample IP Addresses

The following figure uses sample IP addresses to help you understand the field of

My WAN Addr

in menu

11.3. Refer to the previous

LAN and WAN IP Addresses

figure in the web configurator chapter on LAN setup for a brief review of what a WAN IP is.

My WAN Addr

indicates the local Prestige WAN IP (172.16.0.1 in the following figure) while

Rem IP Addr

indicates the peer WAN IP (172.16.0.2 in the following figure).

Figure 18-4 Sample IP Addresses for a TCP/IP LAN-to-LAN Connection

18.4 Remote Node Filter

Move the cursor to the

Edit Filter Sets

field in menu 11.1, then press [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes

. Press

[ENTER] to display

Menu 11.5 – Remote Node Filter

.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Use

Menu 11.5 – Remote Node Filter

to specify the filter set(s) to apply to the incoming and outgoing traffic between this remote node and the Prestige and also to prevent certain packets from triggering calls.

You can specify up to 4 filter sets separated by comma, for example, 1, 5, 9, 12, in each filter field.

Note that spaces are accepted in this field. The Prestige has a prepackaged filter set, NetBIOS_WAN, that blocks NetBIOS packets. Include this in the call filter sets if you want to prevent NetBIOS packets from triggering calls to a remote node.

Menu 11.5 - Remote Node Filter

Input Filter Sets:

protocol filters= 11, 12

device filters=

Output Filter Sets:

protocol filters=

device filters=

Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

Figure 18-5 Menu 11.5 Remote Node Filter (RFC 1483 or ENET Encapsulation)

Menu 11.5 - Remote Node Filter

Input Filter Sets:

protocol filters= 11, 12

device filters=

Output Filter Sets:

protocol filters=

device filters=

Call Filter Sets:

Protocol filters=

Device filters=

Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

Figure 18-6 Menu 11.5 Remote Node Filter (PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation)

18.4.1 Web Configurator Internet Security Filter Rules

In the web configurator, open the

Security

screen as shown next. Select the predefined filter rules and click

Apply

.

Remote Node Configuration 18-9

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 18-7 Internet Security

Once you apply the filter rules in the web configurator, filter sets 11 and 12 are automatically applied in the

protocol filters

field under

Input Filter Sets

in SMT menu 11.5.

SMT input protocol filter set numbers that were previously applied are erased after you apply the

Internet Security

filter rules in the web configurator. To reapply them or apply new filter sets, you need to enter the filter set numbers again along with filter sets 11 and 12. For example, to apply filter sets 1 and 2, you enter “1, 2, 11,

12”.

18.4.2 Web Configurator Filter Sets

When you apply filter rules using the web configurator, filter sets 11 and 12 are automatically generated in

SMT menu 21. This feature is not available on all models.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 21 - Filter Set Configuration

Filter Filter

Set # Comments Set # Comments

------ ----------------- ------ -----------------

1 _______________ 7 _______________

2 NetBIOS_WAN 8 _______________

3 NetBIOS_LAN 9 _______________

4 _______________ 10 _______________

5 _______________ 11 WebSet1

6 _______________ 12 WebSet2

Enter Filter Set Number to Configure= 0

Figure 18-8 Menu 21- Filer Set Configuration

The following figures display the filter rules in filter sets 11 and 12.

Menu 21.11 - Filter Rules Summary

# A Type Filter Rules M m n

- - ---- --------------------------------------------------------------- - - -

1 Y IP Pr=17, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=161 N D N

2 Y IP Pr=17, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=162 N D F

3 N

4 N

5 N

6 N

Enter Filter Rule Number (1-6) to Configure:

Figure 18-9 Menu 21.11- WebSet 11

Menu 21.12 - Filter Rules Summary

# A Type Filter Rules M m n

- - ---- --------------------------------------------------------------- - - -

1 Y IP Pr=6, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=23 N D N

2 Y IP Pr=6, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=21 N D N

3 Y IP Pr=17, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=69 N D N

4 Y IP Pr=6, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=80 N D N

5 N

6 N

Enter Filter Rule Number (1-6) to Configure

Figure 18-10 Menu 21.12- WebSet 12

Remote Node Configuration 18-11

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Do not edit filter sets 11 and 12. They are used exclusively by the web configurator.

Any rules you configured in sets 11 and 12 will be erased and replaced when you apply the web configurator-generated filter rules.

18.5 Editing ATM Layer Options

Follow the steps shown next to edit

Menu 11.6 – Remote Node ATM Layer Options

.

In menu 11.1, move the cursor to the

Edit ATM Options

field and then press [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes

.

Press [ENTER] to display

Menu 11.6 – Remote Node ATM Layer Options

.

There are two versions of menu 11.6 for the Prestige, depending on whether you chose

VC-based

/

LLCbased

multiplexing and

PPP

encapsulation in menu 11.1.

18.5.1 VC-based Multiplexing (non-PPP Encapsulation)

For

VC-based

multiplexing, by prior agreement, a protocol is assigned a specific virtual circuit, for example,

VC1 will carry IP. Separate VPI and VCI numbers must be specified for each protocol.

Menu 11.6 - Remote Node ATM Layer Options

VPI/VCI (VC-Multiplexing)

VC Options for IP:

VPI #= 8

VCI #= 35

ATM QoS Type= UBR

Peak Cell Rate (PCR)= 0

Sustain Cell Rate (SCR)= 0

Maximum Burst Size (MBS)= 0

VC Options for Bridge:

VPI #= 1

VCI #= 36

ATM QoS Type= N/A

Peak Cell Rate (PCR)= N/A

Sustain Cell Rate (SCR)= N/A

Maximum Burst Size (MBR)= N/A

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Separate VPI and

VCI numbers must be specified.

Figure 18-11 Menu 11.6 for VC-based Multiplexing

18.5.2 LLC-based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation

For

LLC-based

multiplexing or

PPP

encapsulation, one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 11.6 - Remote Node ATM Layer Options

VPI/VCI (LLC-Multiplexing or PPP-Encapsulation)

VPI #= 8

VCI #= 35

ATM QoS Type= UBR

Peak Cell Rate (PCR)= 0

Sustain Cell Rate (SCR)= 0

Maximum Burst Size (MBS)= 0

ENTER here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

.

Only one set of VPI and VCI numbers needs to be specified.

Figure 18-12 Menu 11.6 for LLC-based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation

In this case, only one set of VPI and VCI numbers need be specified for all protocols. The valid range for the

VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (1 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic).

18.5.3 Advance Setup Options

In menu 11.1, select

PPPoE

in the

Encapsulation

field.

Menu 11.1 - Remote Node Profile

Rem Node Name= MyISP Route= IP

Active= Yes Bridge= No

Encapsulation= PPPoE

Edit IP/Bridge= No

Multiplexing= LLC-based Edit ATM Options= No

Service Name=

Edit Advance Options= Yes

Incoming: Telco Option:

Rem Login= Allocated Budget(min)= 0

Rem Password= ******** Period(hr)= 0

Outgoing: Schedule Sets=

My Login= ? Nailed-Up Connection= No

My Password= ? Session Options:

Authen= CHAP/PAP Edit Filter Sets= No

Idle Timeout(sec)= 0

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 18-13 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile

Move the cursor to the

Edit Advance Options

field, press [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes ,

then press

[ENTER] to display

Menu 11.8

Advance Setup Options

.

Remote Node Configuration 18-13

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 11.8 - Advance Setup Options

PPPoE pass-through= No

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 18-14 Menu 11.8 Advance Setup Options

The following table describes the fields in this menu.

Table 18-3 Menu 11.8 Advance Setup Options

FIELD DESCRIPTION

PPPoE passthrough

Press [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes

and press [ENTER] to enable PPPoE pass through. In addition to the Prestige's built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Prestige. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address.

PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for applications where NAT is not appropriate.

Press [SPACE BAR] to select

No

and press [ENTER] to disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP.

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 19

Static Route Setup

This chapter shows how to setup IP static routes.

19.1 IP Static Route Overview

Static routes tell the Prestige routing information that it cannot learn automatically through other means. This can arise in cases where RIP is disabled on the LAN or a remote network is beyond the one that is directly connected to a remote node.

Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected and the Prestige has no knowledge of the networks beyond. For instance, the Prestige knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node Router 1. However, the Prestige is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it does not know that there is a route through remote node Router 1 (via Router 2). The static routes allow you to tell the Prestige about the networks beyond the remote nodes.

Static Route Setup

Figure 19-1 Sample Static Routing Topology

19-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

19.2 Configuration

Step 1.

To configure an IP static route, use

Menu 12

Static Route Setup

(shown next).

Menu 12 - Static Route Setup

1. IP Static Route

3. Bridge Static Route

Please enter selection:

Figure 19-2 Menu 12 Static Route Setup

Step 2.

From menu 12, select 1 to open

Menu 12.1

IP Static Route Setup

(shown next).

Menu 12.1 - IP Static Route Setup

1. ________

2. ________

3. ________

4. ________

5. ________

6. ________

7. ________

8. ________

9. ________

10. ________

11. ________

12. ________

13. ________

14. ________

15. ________

16. ________

Enter selection number:

Figure 19-3 Menu 12.1 IP Static Route Setup

Step 3.

Now, type the route number of a static route you want to configure.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 12.1.1 - Edit IP Static Route

Route #: 1

Route Name= ?

Active= No

Destination IP Address= ?

IP Subnet Mask= ?

Gateway IP Address= ?

Metric= 2

Private= No

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 19-4 Menu12.1.1 Edit IP Static Route

The following table describes the fields for

Menu 12.1.1 – Edit IP Static Route

.

Table 19-1 Menu12.1.1 Edit IP Static Route

Route #

FIELD DESCRIPTION

This is the index number of the static route that you chose in menu 12.1.

Route Name

Active

Type a descriptive name for this route. This is for identification purpose only.

This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.

Destination IP Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID.

IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask for this destination. Follow the discussion on

IP Subnet

Mask

in this manual.

Gateway IP Address Type the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Prestige that will forward the packet to the destination. On the LAN, the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Prestige; over WAN, the gateway must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes.

Metric Metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Type a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.

Static Route Setup 19-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 19-1 Menu12.1.1 Edit IP Static Route

Private

FIELD DESCRIPTION

This parameter determines if the Prestige will include the route to this remote node in its RIP broadcasts. If set to

Yes

, this route is kept private and is not included in RIP broadcasts. If

No

, the route to this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts.

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 20

Bridging Setup

This chapter shows you how to configure the bridging parameters of your Prestige.

20.1 Bridging in General

Bridging bases the forwarding decision on the MAC (Media Access Control), or hardware address, while routing does it on the network layer (IP) address. Bridging allows the Prestige to transport packets of network layer protocols that it does not route, for example, SNA, from one network to another. The caveat is that, compared to routing, bridging generates more traffic for the same network layer protocol, and it also demands more CPU cycles and memory.

For efficiency reasons, do

not

turn on bridging unless you need to support protocols other than IP on your network. For IP, enable the routing if you need it; do not bridge what the Prestige can route.

20.2 Bridge Ethernet Setup

Basically, all non-local packets are bridged to the WAN. Your Prestige does not support IPX.

20.2.1 Remote Node Bridging Setup

Follow the procedure in another section to configure the protocol-independent parameters in

Menu 11.1 –

Remote Node Profile

. For bridging-related parameters, you need to configure

Menu 11.3 – Remote Node

Network Layer Options

.

To setup

Menu 11.3 – Remote Node Network Layer Options

shown in the next figure, follow these steps:

Step 1.

In menu 11.1, make sure the

Bridge

field is set to

Yes

.

Bridging Setup 20-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 11.1 - Remote Node Profile

Rem Node Name= ? Route= IP

Active= Yes

Encapsulation= ENET ENCAP

Bridge= Yes

Edit IP/Bridge= No

Multiplexing= VC-based Edit ATM Options= No

Service Name= N/A Edit Advance Options= N/A

Incoming: Telco Option:

Rem Login= N/A Allocated Budget(min)= N/A

Rem Password= N/A Period(hr)= N/A

Outgoing: Schedule Sets= N/A

My Login= N/A Nailed-Up Connection= N/A

My Password= N/A Session Options:

Authen= N/A Edit Filter Sets= No

Idle Timeout(sec)= N/A

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 20-1 Menu 11.1 Remote Node Profile

Step 2.

Move the cursor to the

Edit IP/Bridge

field, then press [

SPACE BAR

] to set the value to

Yes

and press [ENTER] to edit

Menu 11.3 – Remote Node Network Layer Options

.

Menu 11.3 - Remote Node Network Layer Options

IP Options: Bridge Options:

IP Address Assignment= Static

Ethernet Addr Timeout (min)= 0

Rem IP Addr: 0.0.0.0

Rem Subnet Mask= 0.0.0.0

My WAN Addr= 0.0.0.0

NAT= Full Feature

Address Mapping Set=2

Metric= 2

Private= No

RIP Direction= Both

Version= RIP-2B

Multicast= IGMP-v2

IP Policies=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 20-2 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 20-1 Remote Node Network Layer Options : Bridge Fields

Bridge (menu 11.1)

Edit IP/Bridge (menu

11.1)

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Make sure this field is set to

Yes

.

Press [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes

and press [ENTER] to display menu 11.3.

Ethernet Addr Timeout

(min.) (menu 11.3)

Type the time (in minutes) for the Prestige to retain the Ethernet Address information in its internal tables while the line is down. If this information is retained, your Prestige will not have to recompile the tables when the line comes back up.

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

20.2.2 Bridge Static Route Setup

Similar to network layer static routes, a bridging static route tells the Prestige the route to a node before a connection is established. You configure bridge static routes in menu 12.3.1 (go to menu 12, choose option 3, then choose a static route to edit) as shown next.

Menu 12.3.1 - Edit Bridge Static Route

Route #: 1

Route Name=

Active= No

Ether Address= ?

IP Address=

Gateway Node= 1

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 20-3 Menu 12.3.1 Edit Bridge Static Route

The following table describes the

Edit Bridge Static Route

menu.

Table 20-2 Menu 12.3.1 Edit Bridge Static Route

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Route # This is the route index number you typed in

Menu 12.3 – Bridge Static Route Setup

.

Route Name Type a name for the bridge static route for identification purposes.

Bridging Setup 20-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 20-2 Menu 12.3.1 Edit Bridge Static Route

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Active Indicates whether the static route is active (

Yes

) or not (

No

).

Ether Address Type the MAC address of the destination computer that you want to bridge the packets to.

IP Address If available, type the IP address of the destination computer that you want to bridge the packets to.

Gateway Node Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select the number of the remote node (one to eight) that is the gateway of this static route.

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 21

Network Address Translation (NAT)

This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Prestige.

21.1 Using NAT

You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up SUA/NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the Prestige.

21.1.1 SUA (Single User Account) Versus NAT

SUA (Single User Account) is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping,

Many-to-One

and

Server

. See

section 21.3.1

for a detailed description of the NAT set for SUA.

The Prestige also supports

Full Feature

NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN

IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types

.

1. Choose if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige.

2. Choose if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige.

21.2 Applying NAT

You apply NAT via menus 4 or 11.3 as displayed next. The next figure shows you how to apply NAT for

Internet access in menu 4. Enter 4 from the main menu to go to

Menu 4 - Internet Access Setup

.

NAT 21-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 4 - Internet Access Setup

ISP's Name= MyISP

Encapsulation= RFC 1483

Multiplexing= LLC-based

VPI #= 8

VCI #= 35

ATM QoS Type= UBR

Peak Cell Rate (PCR)= 0

Sustain Cell Rate (SCR)= 0

Maximum Burst Size (MBS)= 0

My Login= N/A

My Password= N/A

ENET ENCAP Gateway= N/A

IP Address Assignment= Static

IP Address= 0.0.0.0

Network Address Translation= SUA Only

Address Mapping Set= N/A

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 21-1 Menu 4 Applying NAT for Internet Access

The following figure shows how you apply NAT to the remote node in menu 11.1.

Step 1.

Enter 11 from the main menu.

Step 2.

When menu 11 appears, as shown in the following figure, type the number of the remote node that you want to configure.

Step 3.

Move the cursor to the

Edit IP/Bridge

field, press [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes

and then press

[ENTER] to bring up

Menu 11.3 - Remote Node Network Layer Options.

21-2 NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 11.3 - Remote Node Network Layer Options

IP Options: Bridge Options:

IP Address Assignment = Dynamic Ethernet Addr Timeout(min)= N/A

Rem IP Addr = 0.0.0.0

Rem Subnet Mask= 0.0.0.0

My WAN Addr= N/A

NAT= SUA Only

Address Mapping Set= N/A

Metric= 2

Private= No

RIP Direction= None

Version= RIP-1

Multicast= None

IP Policies=

Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

Figure 21-2 Menu 11.3 Applying NAT to the Remote Node

The following table describes the options for Network Address Translation.

Table 21-1 Applying NAT in Menus 4 & 11.3

FIELD DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE

NAT Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select

Full Feature

have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige. The SMT uses the address mapping set that you configure and enter in the

Address Mapping Set

field (menu 15.1 - see section

21.3.1

).

if you

Full Feature

Select

None

to disable NAT.

When you select

SUA Only

, the SMT uses Address Mapping Set 255

(menu 15.1 - see section

21.3.1

). Choose

SUA Only

if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige.

None

SUA Only

21.3 NAT Setup

Use the address mapping sets menus and submenus to create the mapping table used to assign global addresses to computers on the LAN.

Set 255

is used for SUA. When you select

Full Feature

in menu 4 or

11.3, the SMT will use

Set 1

. When you select

SUA Only

, the SMT will use the pre-configured

Set 255

(read only).

The server set is a list of LAN servers mapped to external ports. To use this set, a server rule must be set up inside the NAT address mapping set. Please see the section on port forwarding in the chapter on NAT web

NAT 21-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway configurator screens for further information on these menus. To configure NAT, enter 15 from the main menu to bring up the following screen.

Menu 15 - NAT Setup

1. Address Mapping Sets

2. NAT Server Sets

Enter Menu Selection Number:

Figure 21-3 Menu 15 NAT Setup

21.3.1 Address Mapping Sets

Enter 1 to bring up

Menu 15.1 — Address Mapping Sets

.

Menu 15.1 - Address Mapping Sets

1. ACL Default Set

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

255. SUA (read only)

Enter Menu Selection Number:

Enter Menu Selection Number:

Figure 21-4 Menu 15.1 Address Mapping Sets

SUA Address Mapping Set

Enter 255 to display the next screen (see also

section 21.1.1)

. The fields in this menu cannot be changed.

21-4 NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 15.1.255 - Address Mapping Rules

Set Name= SUA

Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type

--- --------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- ------

1. 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 M-1

2. 0.0.0.0 Server

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 21-5 Menu 15.1.255 SUA Address Mapping Rules

The following table explains the fields in this menu.

Menu 15.1.255 is read-only.

Table 21-2 SUA Address Mapping Rules

Set Name

Idx

Local Start IP

Local End IP

Global Start IP

Global End IP

Type

This is the name of the set you selected in menu 15.1 or enter the name of a new set you want to create.

This is the index or rule number.

Local Start IP

is the starting local IP address (ILA).

Local End IP

is the ending local IP address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IPs, then the Start IP is 0.0.0.0 and the End IP is

255.255.255.255.

This is the starting global IP address (IGA). If you have a dynamic

IP, enter 0.0.0.0 as the

Global Start IP

.

This is the ending global IP address (IGA).

These are the mapping types.

Server

allows us to specify multiple servers of different types behind NAT to this machine. See later for some examples.

SUA

1

0.0.0.0

255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0

Server

NAT 21-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 21-2 SUA Address Mapping Rules

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

User-Defined Address Mapping Sets

Now let’s look at option 1 in menu 15.1. Enter 1 to bring up this menu. We’ll just look at the differences from the previous menu. Note the extra

Action

and

Select Rule

fields mean you can configure rules in this screen. Note also that the [?] in the

Set Name

field means that this is a required field and you must enter a name for the set.

Menu 15.1.1 - Address Mapping Rules

Set Name= ACL Default Set

Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type

--- --------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- ------

1.

2

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Action= Edit Select Rule=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 21-6 Menu 15.1.1 First Set

If the

Set Name

field is left blank, the entire set will be deleted.

The Type, Local and Global Start/End IPs are configured in menu 15.1.1.1

(described later) and the values are displayed here.

Ordering Your Rules

Ordering your rules is important because the Prestige applies the rules in the order that you specify. When a rule matches the current packet, the Prestige takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are

21-6 NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway ignored. If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule, your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty rules. For example, if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9. In the set summary screen, the new rule will be rule 7, not 9.

Now if you delete rule 4, rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by 1 rule, so as old rule 5 becomes rule 4, old rule 6 becomes rule 5 and old rule 7 becomes rule 6.

Table 21-3 Menu 15.1.1 First Set

Set Name

Action

Select Rule

Enter a name for this set of rules. This is a required field. If this field is left blank, the entire set will be deleted.

The default is

Edit

.

Edit

means you want to edit a selected rule (see following field).

Insert Before

means to insert a rule before the rule selected. The rules after the selected rule will then be moved down by one rule.

Delete

means to delete the selected rule and then all the rules after the selected one will be advanced one rule.

None

disables the

Select Rule

item.

When you choose

Edit

,

Insert Before

or

Delete

in the previous field the cursor jumps to this field to allow you to select the rule to apply the action in question.

ACL Default

Set

Edit

1

You must press

[ENTER]

at the bottom of the screen to save the whole set. You must do this again if you make any changes to the set – including deleting a rule.

No changes to the set take place until this action is taken.

Selecting

Edit

in the

Action

field and then selecting a rule brings up the following menu,

Menu 15.1.1.1

-

Address Mapping Rule

in which you can edit an individual rule and configure the

Type

,

Local

and

Global

Start/End IPs

.

An End IP address must be numerically greater than its corresponding IP Start address.

NAT 21-7

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 15.1.1.1 Address Mapping Rule

Type= One-to-One

Local IP:

Start=

End = N/A

Global IP:

Start=

End = N/A

Server Mapping Set= N/A

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Press Space Bar to Toggle.

Figure 21-7 Menu 15.1.1.1 Editing/Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set

The following table explains the fields in this menu.

Table 21-4 Menu 15.1.1.1 Editing/Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set

Type

Local IP

Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select from a total of five types.

These are the mapping types discussed in the chapter on NAT web configurator screens.

Server

allows you to specify multiple servers of different types behind NAT to this computer. See

section 21.5.3

for an example.

Only local IP fields are

N/A

for server; Global IP fields MUST be set for

Server

.

Start This is the starting local IP address (ILA).

Global IP

End This is the ending local IP address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IPs, then put the Start IP as 0.0.0.0 and the End IP as 255.255.255.255. This field is

N/A

for One-to-One and Server types.

Start This is the starting inside global IP address (IGA). If you have a dynamic

IP, enter 0.0.0.0 as the

Global IP Start

. Note that

Global IP Start

can be set to 0.0.0.0 only if the types are

Many-to-One

or

Server

.

End This is the ending inside global IP address (IGA). This field is

N/A

for

Oneto-One

,

Many-to-One

and

Server types

.

One-to-One

0.0.0.0

N/A

0.0.0.0

N/A

21-8 NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 21-4 Menu 15.1.1.1 Editing/Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set

Server

Mapping Set

Only available when

Type

is set to

Server

.

Type a number from 1 to 10 to choose a server set from menu 15.2.

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

21.4 Configuring a Server behind NAT

Follow these steps to configure a server behind NAT:

Step 1.

Enter 15 in the main menu to go to

Menu 15 - NAT Setup.

Step 2.

Enter 2 to display

Menu 15.2 - NAT Server Sets

as shown next.

Menu 15.2 - NAT Server Sets

1. Server Set 1 (Used for SUA Only)

2. Server Set 2

3. Server Set 3

4. Server Set 4

5. Server Set 5

6. Server Set 6

7. Server Set 7

8. Server Set 8

9. Server Set 9

10. Server Set 10

Enter Set Number to Edit:

Figure 21-8 Menu 15.2 NAT Server Setup

Step 3.

Enter 1 to go to

Menu 15.2.1 NAT Server Setup

as follows.

NAT 21-9

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 15.2 - NAT Server Setup

Rule Start Port No. End Port No. IP Address

---------------------------------------------------

1. Default Default 0.0.0.0

2. 21 21 192.168.1.33

3. 0 0 0.0.0.0

4. 0 0 0.0.0.0

5. 0 0 0.0.0.0

6. 0 0 0.0.0.0

7. 0 0 0.0.0.0

8. 0 0 0.0.0.0

9. 0 0 0.0.0.0

10. 0 0 0.0.0.0

11. 0 0 0.0.0.0

12. 0 0 0.0.0.0

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 21-9 Menu 15.2.1 NAT Server Setup

Step 4.

Enter a port number in an unused

Start Port No

field. To forward only one port, enter it again in the

End Port No

field. To specify a range of ports, enter the last port to be forwarded in the

End

Port No

field.

Step 5.

Enter the inside IP address of the server in the

IP Address

field. In the following figure, you have a computer acting as an FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (ports 21, 23 and 25) at 192.168.1.33.

Step 6.

Press [ENTER] at the “Press ENTER to confirm …” prompt to save your configuration after you define all the servers or press [ESC] at any time to cancel.

21-10 NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 21-10 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example

21.5 General NAT Examples

The following are some examples of NAT configuration.

21.5.1 Example 1: Internet Access Only

In the following Internet access example, you only need one rule where your ILAs (Inside Local addresses) all map to one dynamic IGA (Inside Global Address) assigned by your ISP.

NAT

Figure 21-11 NAT Example 1

21-11

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 4 - Internet Access Setup

ISP's Name= MyISP

Encapsulation= RFC 1483

Multiplexing= LLC-based

VPI #= 8

VCI #= 35

ATM QoS Type= UBR

Peak Cell Rate (PCR)= 0

Sustain Cell Rate (SCR)= 0

Maximum Burst Size (MBS)= 0

My Login= N/A

My Password= N/A

ENET ENCAP Gateway= N/A

IP Address Assignment= Static

IP Address= 0.0.0.0

Network Address Translation= SUA Only

Address Mapping Set= N/A

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 21-12 Menu 4 Internet Access & NAT Example

From menu 4, choose the

SUA Only

option from the

Network Address Translation

field. This is the

Many-to-One mapping discussed in

section 21.5.

The

SUA Only

read-only option from the

Network

Address Translation

field in menus 4 and 11.3 is specifically pre-configured to handle this case.

21.5.2 Example 2: Internet Access with an Inside Server

Figure 21-13 NAT Example 2

In this case, you do exactly as above (use the convenient pre-configured

SUA Only

set) and also go to menu

15.2 to specify the Inside Server behind the NAT as shown in the next figure.

21-12 NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 15.2.1 - NAT Server Setup (Used for SUA Only)

Rule Start Port No. End Port No. IP Address

---------------------------------------------------

1. Default Default 192.168.1.10

2. 0 0 0.0.0.0

3. 0 0 0.0.0.0

4. 0 0 0.0.0.0

5. 0 0 0.0.0.0

6. 0 0 0.0.0.0

7. 0 0 0.0.0.0

8. 0 0 0.0.0.0

9. 0 0 0.0.0.0

10. 0 0 0.0.0.0

11. 0 0 0.0.0.0

12. 0 0 0.0.0.0

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 21-14 Menu 15.2.1 Specifying an Inside Server

21.5.3 Example 3: Multiple Public IP Addresses With Inside Servers

In this example, there are 3 IGAs from our ISP. There are many departments but two have their own FTP server. All departments share the same router. The example will reserve one IGA for each department with an FTP server and all departments use the other IGA. Map the FTP servers to the first two IGAs and the other LAN traffic to the remaining IGA. Map the third IGA to an inside web server and mail server. Four rules need to be configured, two bi-directional and two unidirectional as follows.

Rule 1.

Map the first IGA to the first inside FTP server for FTP traffic in both directions (

1 : 1

mapping, giving both local and global IP addresses).

Rule 2.

Map the second IGA to our second inside FTP server for FTP traffic in both directions (

1 : 1

mapping, giving both local and global IP addresses).

Rule 3.

Map the other outgoing LAN traffic to IGA3 (

Many : 1

mapping).

Rule 4.

You also map your third IGA to the web server and mail server on the LAN. Type

Server

allows you to specify multiple servers, of different types, to other computers behind NAT on the LAN.

The example situation looks somewhat like this:

NAT 21-13

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 21-15 NAT Example 3

Step 1.

In this case you need to configure Address Mapping Set 1 from

Menu 15.1 - Address Mapping

Sets.

Therefore you must choose the

Full Feature

option from the

Network Address

Translation

field (in menu 4 or menu 11.3) in

Figure 21-16

.

Step 2.

Then enter 15 from the main menu.

Step 3.

Enter 1 to configure the Address Mapping Sets.

Step 4.

Enter 1 to begin configuring this new set. Enter a Set Name, choose the

Edit Action

and then enter 1 for the

Select Rule

field. Press [ENTER] to confirm.

Step 5.

Select

Type

as

One-to-One

(direct mapping for packets going both ways) , and enter the local

Start IP

as 192.168.1.10 (the IP address of FTP Server 1), the global

Start IP

as 10.132.50.1 (our first IGA). (See

Figure 21-17).

Step 6.

Repeat the previous step for rules 2 to 4 as outlined above.

Step 7.

When finished, menu 15.1.1 should look like as shown in

Figure 21-18

.

21-14 NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 11.3 - Remote Node Network Layer Options

IP Options: Bridge Options:

IP Address Assignment= Static Ethernet Addr Timeout (min)= 0

Rem IP Addr: 0.0.0.0

Rem Subnet Mask= 0.0.0.0

My WAN Addr= 0.0.0.0

NAT= Full Feature

Address Mapping Set= 2

Metric= 2

Private= No

RIP Direction= Both

Version= RIP-2B

Multicast= IGMP-v2

IP Policies=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 21-16 Example 3: Menu 11.3

The following figures show how to configure the first rule

Menu 15.1.1.1 Address Mapping Rule

Type= One-to-One

Local IP:

Start= 192.168.1.10

End = N/A

Global IP:

Start= 10.132.50.1

End = N/A

Server Mapping Set= N/A

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Press Space Bar to Toggle.

Figure 21-17 Example 3: Menu 15.1.1.1

NAT 21-15

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 15.1.1 - Address Mapping Rules

Set Name= Example3

Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type

--- --------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- ------

1. 192.168.1.10 10.132.50.1 1-1

2 192.168.1.11 10.132.50.2 1-1

3. 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 10.132.50.3 M-1

4. 10.132.50.3 Server

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Action= Edit Select Rule=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 21-18 Example 3: Final Menu 15.1.1

Now configure the IGA3 to map to our web server and mail server on the LAN.

Step 8.

Enter 15 from the main menu.

Step 9.

Enter 2 in

Menu 15 - NAT Setup

.

Step 10.

Enter 1 in

Menu 15.2 - NAT Server Sets

to see the following menu. Configure it as shown.

21-16 NAT

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 15.2.1 - NAT Server Setup

Rule Start Port No. End Port No. IP Address

---------------------------------------------------

1. Default Default 0.0.0.0

2. 80 80 192.168.1.21

3. 25 25 192.168.1.20

4. 0 0 0.0.0.0

5. 0 0 0.0.0.0

6. 0 0 0.0.0.0

7. 0 0 0.0.0.0

8. 0 0 0.0.0.0

9. 0 0 0.0.0.0

10. 0 0 0.0.0.0

11. 0 0 0.0.0.0

12. 0 0 0.0.0.0

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Example 3: Menu 15.2.1

21.5.4 Example 4: NAT Unfriendly Application Programs

Some applications do not support NAT Mapping using TCP or UDP port address translation. In this case it is better to use

Many-to-Many No Overload

mapping as port numbers do

not

change for

Many-to-Many

No Overload

(and

One-to-One

) NAT mapping types. The following figure illustrates this.

NAT

Figure 21-19 NAT Example 4

21-17

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Other applications such as some gaming programs are NAT unfriendly because they embed addressing information in the data stream. These applications won’t work through NAT even when using

One-to-One

and

Many-to-Many No Overload

mapping types.

Follow the steps outlined in example 3 to configure these two menus as follows.

Menu 15.1.1.1 Address Mapping Rule

Type= Many-to-Many No Overload

Local IP:

Start= 192.168.1.10

End = 192.168.1.12

Global IP:

Start= 10.132.50.1

End = 10.132.50.3

Server Mapping Set= N/A

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 21-20 Example 4: Menu 15.1.1.1 Address Mapping Rule

After you’ve configured your rule, you should be able to check the settings in menu 15.1.1 as shown next.

Menu 15.1.1 - Address Mapping Rules

Set Name= Example4

Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type

--- --------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- ------

1. 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.12 10.132.50.1 10.132.50.3 M:M NO OV

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Action= Edit Select Rule=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 21-21 Example 4: Menu 15.1.1 Address Mapping Rules

21-18 NAT

SMT Advanced Management

Part VII:

SMT Advanced Management

This part discusses filtering setup, SNMP, system information and diagnosis, firmware and configuration file maintenance, system maintenance, remote management, IP Policy Routing and call scheduling.

See the web configurator parts of this guide for background information on features configurable by web configurator and SMT.

VII

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 22

Filter Configuration

This chapter shows you how to create and apply filters.

22.1 About Filtering

Your Prestige uses filters to decide whether or not to allow passage of a data packet and/or to make a call.

There are two types of filter applications: data filtering and call filtering. Filters are subdivided into device and protocol filters, which are discussed later.

Data filtering screens data to determine if the packet should be allowed to pass. Data filters are divided into incoming and outgoing filters, depending on the direction of the packet relative to a port. Data filtering can be applied on either the WAN side or the Ethernet side. Call filtering is used to determine if a packet should be allowed to trigger a call.

Outgoing packets must undergo data filtering before they encounter call filtering. Call filters are divided into two groups, the built-in call filters and user-defined call filters. Your Prestige has built-in call filters that prevent administrative, for example, RIP packets from triggering calls. These filters are always enabled and not accessible to you. Your Prestige applies the built-in filters first and then the user-defined call filters, if applicable, as shown next.

Filter Configuration 22-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Outgoing

Packet

Data

No match

Match

Built-in default

Call Filters

Match

Call Filtering

No match

User-defined

Call Filters

(if applicable)

Match

No match

Active Data

Initiate call if line not up

Send packet and reset

Idle Timer

Drop packet

Drop packet if line not up

Or

Drop packet if line not up

Or

Send packet but do not reset

Idle Timer

Send packet but do not reset

Idle Timer

Figure 22-1 Outgoing Packet Filtering Process

Two sets of factory filter rules have been configured in menu 21 to prevent NetBIOS traffic from triggering calls. A summary of their filter rules is shown in the figures that follow.

The following figure illustrates the logic flow when executing a filter rule.

22-2 Filter Configuration

Fetch Next

Filter Set

Yes

Next Filter Set

Available?

No

Filter Set

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Start

Packet intoFilter

Fetch First

Filter Set

Fetch First

Filter Rule

Fetch Next

Filter Rule

Yes

Next filter

Rule

Available?

No

Active?

Yes

No

Execute

Filter Rule

Check

Next

Rule

Forward

Drop

Drop Packet Accept Packet

Figure 22-2 Filter Rule Process

You can apply up to four filter sets to a particular port to block various types of packets. Because each filter set can have up to six rules, you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for a single port.

Filter Configuration 22-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

For incoming packets, your Prestige applies data filters only. Packets are processed depending on whether a match is found. The following sections describe how to configure filter sets.

The Filter Structure of the Prestige

A filter set consists of one or more filter rules. Usually, you would group related rules, for example, all the rules for NetBIOS, into a single set and give it a descriptive name. You can configure up to twelve filter sets with six rules in each set, for a total of 72 filter rules in the system.

22.2 Configuring a Filter Set for the Prestige

To configure a filter set, follow the steps shown next.

Step 1.

Enter 21 in the main menu to display

Menu 21 - Filter Set Configuration

as shown next.

Menu 21 - Filter Set Configuration

Filter Filter

Set # Comments Set # Comments

------ ----------------- ------ -----------------

1 _______________ 7 _______________

2 NetBIOS_WAN 8 _______________

3 NetBIOS_LAN 9 _______________

4 _______________ 10 _______________

5 _______________ 11 WebSet1

6 _______________ 12 WebSet2

Enter Filter Set Number to Configure= 0

Edit Comments= N/A

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 22-3 Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration

Step 2.

Type the filter set to configure (no. 1 to 12) and press [ENTER]

.

Step 3.

Type a descriptive name or comment in the

Edit Comments

field and press [ ENTER ].

Step 4.

Press [ENTER] at the message

Press ENTER to confirm…” to display

Menu 21.1 – Filter

Rules Summary

(that is, if you selected filter set 1 in menu 21).

22-4 Filter Configuration

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 21.2 - Filter Rules Summary

# A Type Filter Rules M m n

- - ---- --------------------------------------------------------------- - - -

1 Y IP Pr=6, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=137 N D N

2 Y IP Pr=6, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=138 N D N

3 Y IP Pr=6, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=139 N D N

4 Y IP Pr=17, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=137 N D N

5 Y IP Pr=17, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=138 N D N

6 Y IP Pr=17, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=139 N D F

Enter Filter Rule Number (1-6) to Configure:

Figure 22-4 NetBIOS_WAN Filter Rules Summary

Menu 21.3 - Filter Rules Summary

# A Type Filter Rules M m n

- - ---- --------------------------------------------------------------- - - -

1 Y IP Pr=17, SA=0.0.0.0, SP=137, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=53 N D F

2 N

3 N

4 N

5 N

6 N

Enter Filter Rule Number (1-6) to Configure:

Figure 22-5 NetBIOS_LAN Filter Rules Summary

Menu 21.4 - Filter Rules Summary

# A Type Filter Rules M m n

- - ---- --------------------------------------------------------------- - - -

1 Y Gen Off=0, Len=3, Mask=ffffff, Value=01005e N D F

2 N

3 N

4 N

5 N

6 N

Enter Filter Rule Number (1-6) to Configure:

Figure 22-6 IGMP Filter Rules Summary

Filter Configuration 22-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

22.3 Filter Rules Summary Menus

The following tables briefly describe the abbreviations used in menus 21.1 and 21.2.

Table 22-1 Abbreviations Used in the Filter Rules Summary Menu

#

FIELD DESCRIPTION

The filter rule number: 1 to 6.

A

Type

Active: “Y” means the rule is active. “N” means the rule is inactive.

The type of filter rule: “GEN” for Generic, “IP” for TCP/IP.

Filter Rules These parameters are displayed here.

M More.

“Y” means there are more rules to check which form a rule chain with the present rule.

An action cannot be taken until the rule chain is complete.

“N” means there are no more rules to check. You can specify an action to be taken for instance, forward the packet, drop the packet or check the next rule. For the latter, the next rule is independent of the rule just checked. n

“F” means to forward the packet immediately and skip checking the remaining rules.

“D” means to drop the packet.

“N“ means to check the next rule.

Action Not Matched.

“F” means to forward the packet immediately and skip checking the remaining rules.

“D” means to drop the packet.

“N” means to check the next rule.

The protocol dependent filter rules abbreviation are listed as follows:

Table 22-2 Rule Abbreviations Used

FILTER TYPE DESCRIPTION

IP

Pr Protocol

SP Source Port Number

22-6 Filter Configuration

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 22-2 Rule Abbreviations Used

FILTER TYPE DESCRIPTION

DP Destination Port Number

GEN

Off Offset

Len Length

22.4 Configuring a Filter Rule

To configure a filter rule, type its number in

Menu 21.x – Filter Rules Summary

and press [ENTER] to open menu 21.x.1 for the rule.

There are two types of filter rules:

TCP/IP

and

Generic

. Depending on the type of rule, the parameters for each type will be different. Use [SPACE BAR] to select the type of rule that you want to create in the

Filter

Type

field and press

[ENTER]

to open the respective menu.

To speed up filtering, all rules in a filter set must be of the same class, for instance, protocol filters or generic filters. The class of a filter set is determined by the first rule that you create. When applying the filter sets to a port, separate menu fields are provided for protocol and device filter sets. If you include a protocol filter set in a device filters field or vice versa, the Prestige will warn you and will not allow you to save.

22.4.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule

This section shows you how to configure a TCP/IP filter rule. TCP/IP rules allow you to base the rule on the fields in the IP and the upper layer protocol, for example, UDP and TCP headers.

To configure TCP/IP rules, select TCP/IP Filter Rule from the

Filter Type

field and press

[ENTER]

to open

Menu 21.x.1 – TCP/IP Filter Rule

, as shown next.

Filter Configuration 22-7

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 21.1.1 - TCP/IP Filter Rule

Filter #: 1,1

Filter Type= TCP/IP Filter Rule

Active= No

IP Protocol= 0 IP Source Route= No

Destination: IP Addr=

IP Mask=

Port #=

Port # Comp= None

Source: IP Addr=

IP Mask=

Port #=

Port # Comp= None

TCP Estab= N/A

More= No Log= None

Action Matched= Check Next Rule

Action Not Matched= Check Next Rule

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Press Space Bar to Toggle.

Figure 22-7 Menu 21.x.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule

The following table describes how to configure your TCP/IP filter rule.

Table 22-3 Menu 21.x.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule

Filter #

Filter Type

Active

This is the filter set, filter rule coordinates, for instance, 2, 3 refers to the second filter set and the third filter rule of that set.

Use [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to choose a rule.

Parameters displayed for each type will be different. Choices are

TCP/IP Filter Rule

or

Generic Filter Rule

.

Select

Yes

to activate or

No

to deactivate the filter rule.

1,1

TCP/IP Filter Rule

No

(default)

0 to 255 IP Protocol

IP Source Route

This is the upper layer protocol, for example, TCP is 6, UDP is 17 and ICMP is 1. The value must be between 0 and 255.

A value of O matches ANY protocol.

IP Source Route is an optional header that dictates the route an IP packet takes from its source to its destination. If

Yes

, the rule applies to any packet with an IP source route. The majority of IP packets do not have source route.

Destination:

No

(default)

22-8 Filter Configuration

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 22-3 Menu 21.x.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule

IP Addr Type the destination IP address of the packet you want to filter. This field is ignored if it is 0.0.0.0.

IP Mask Type the IP mask to apply to the Destination: IP Addr field.

Port # Type the destination port of the packets you want to filter.

The field range is 0 to 65535. A 0 field is ignored.

Port # Comp Select the comparison to apply to the destination port in the packet against the value given in

Destination: Port #.

Choices are

None

,

Less

,

Greater

,

Equal

or

Not Equal

.

Source:

IP Addr Type the source IP Address of the packet you want to filter.

A 0.0.0.0 field is ignored.

IP Mask Type the IP mask to apply to the

Source: IP Addr

field.

Port # Type the source port of the packets you want to filter. The range of this field is 0 to 65535. A 0 field is ignored.

Port # Comp Select the comparison to apply to the source port in the packet against the value given in

Source: Port #

field.

Choices are

None

,

Less

,

Greater

,

Equal

or

Not Equal

.

TCP Estab This applies only when the IP Protocol field is 6, TCP. If

Yes

, the rule matches packets that want to establish TCP connection(s) (SYN=1 and ACK=0); else it is ignored.

More If

Yes

, a matching packet is passed to the next filter rule before an action is taken or else the packet is disposed of according to the action fields.

If

More

is

Yes

, then

Action Matched

and

Action Not

Matched

will be N/A.

Log Select the logging option from the following:

None

– No packets will be logged.

Action Matched

– Only packets that match the rule parameters will be logged.

Action Not Matched

– Only packets that do not match the rule parameters will be logged.

Both

– All packets will be logged.

Filter Configuration

None

22-9

IP address

IP mask

0 to 65535

None

IP address

IP mask

0 to 65535

None

No

(default)

No

(default)

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 22-3 Menu 21.x.1 TCP/IP Filter Rule

Action Matched Select the action for a matching packet. Choices are

Check

Next Rule

,

Forward

or

Drop

.

Action Not Matched Select the action for a packet not matching the rule. Choices are

Check Next Rule

,

Forward

or

Drop

.

Check Next Rule

(default)

Check Next Rule

(default)

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

The following figure illustrates the logic flow of an IP filter.

22-10 Filter Configuration

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Packet into IP Filter

Filter Active?

Yes

Apply SrcAddrMask to Src Addr

No

Check Src

IP Addr

Matched

Apply DestAddrMask to Dest Addr

Not Matched

Check Dest

IP Addr

Matched

Check

IP Protocol

Matched

Check Src &

Dest Port

Matched

More?

Not Matched

Not Matched

Not Matched

Yes

No

Action Matched

Check Next Rule

Check Next Rule

Action Not Matched

Drop Forward

Drop

Drop Packet

Forward

Check Next Rule

Figure 22-8 Executing an IP Filter

Accept Packet

Filter Configuration 22-11

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

22.4.2 Generic Filter Rule

This section shows you how to configure a generic filter rule. The purpose of generic rules is to allow you to filter non-IP packets. For IP, it is generally easier to use the IP rules directly.

For generic rules, the Prestige treats a packet as a byte stream as opposed to an IP packet. You specify the portion of the packet to check with the

Offset

(from 0) and the

Length

fields, both in bytes. The Prestige applies the Mask (bit-wise ANDing) to the data portion before comparing the result against the Value to determine a match. The

Mask

and

Value

fields are specified in hexadecimal numbers. Note that it takes two hexadecimal digits to represent a byte, so if the length is 4, the value in either field will take 8 digits, for example, FFFFFFFF.

To configure a generic rule select an empty filter set in menu 21, for example 5. Select

Generic Filter

Rule

in the

Filter Type

field and press [ENTER] to open

Menu 21.5.1

Generic Filter Rule

, as shown in the following figure.

Menu 21.5.1 - Generic Filter Rule

Filter #: 5,1

Filter Type= Generic Filter Rule

Active= No

Offset= 0

Length= 0

Mask= N/A

Value= N/A

More= No Log= None

Action Matched= Check Next Rule

Action Not Matched= Check Next Rule

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Press Space Bar to Toggle.

Figure 22-9 Menu 21.5.1 Generic Filter Rule

The next table describes the fields in the Generic Filter Rule menu.

22-12 Filter Configuration

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 22-4 Menu 21.5.1 Generic Filter Rule

FIELD DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE

Filter # This is the filter set, filter rule coordinates, for instance, 2, 3 refers to the second filter set and the third rule of that set.

5,1

Filter Type

Active

Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select a type of rule.

Parameters displayed below each type will be different. Choices are

Generic Filter Rule

or

TCP/IP Filter Rule

.

Select

Yes

to turn on or

No

to turn off the filter rule.

Generic Filter

Rule

Offset

Length

Type the starting byte of the data portion in the packet that you want to compare. The range for this field is from 0 to 255.

Type the byte count of the data portion in the packet that you want to compare. The range for this field is 0 to 8.

No

(default)

0

(default)

0

(default)

Mask

Value

More

Type the mask (in Hexadecimal) to apply to the data portion before comparison.

Type the value (in Hexadecimal) to compare with the data portion.

If

Yes

, a matching packet is passed to the next filter rule before an action is taken or else the packet is disposed of according to the action fields.

If

More

is

Yes

, then

Action Matched

and

Action Not Matched

will be

N/A

.

No

(default)

Log Select the logging option from the following:

None

– No packets will be logged.

Action Matched

– Only matching packets and rules will be logged.

Action Not Matched

– Only packets that do not match the rule parameters will be logged.

Both

– All packets will be logged.

Select the action for a matching packet. Choices are

Check Next Rule

,

Forward

or

Drop

.

None

Action

Matched

Check Next

Rule

(default)

Action Not

Matched

Select the action for a packet not matching the rule. Choices are

Next Rule

,

Forward

or

Drop

.

Check Check Next

Rule

(default)

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

Filter Configuration 22-13

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

22.5 Filter Types and NAT

There are two classes of filter rules,

Generic Filter

Device rules and Protocol Filter (

TCP/IP

) rules. Generic

Filter rules act on the raw data from/to LAN and WAN. Protocol Filter rules act on IP packets.

When NAT (Network Address Translation) is enabled, the inside IP address and port number are replaced on a connection-by-connection basis, which makes it impossible to know the exact address and port on the wire. Therefore, the Prestige applies the protocol filters to the “native” IP address and port number before

NAT for outgoing packets and after NAT for incoming packets. On the other hand, the generic (or device) filters are applied to the raw packets that appear on the wire. They are applied at the point where the Prestige is receiving and sending the packets; for instance, the interface. The interface can be an Ethernet, or any other hardware port. The following figure illustrates this.

Figure 22-10 Protocol and Device Filter Sets

22.6 Example Filter

Let’s look at an example to block outside users from telnetting into the Prestige.

22-14 Filter Configuration

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 22-11 Sample Telnet Filter

Step 1.

Enter 21 in the main menu to display

Menu 21 - Filter Set Configuration

.

Step 2.

Enter the index number of the filter set you want to configure (in this case 6)

.

Step 3.

Type a descriptive name or comment in the

Edit Comments

field (for example, TELNET_WAN) and press [ENTER] .

Filter Configuration 22-15

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Step 4.

Press [ENTER] at the message

Press [ENTER] to confirm or [ESC] to cancel” to open

Menu

21.6

Filter Rules Summary

.

Step 5.

Type 1 to configure the first filter rule. Make the entries in this menu as shown next.

When you press [ENTER] to confirm, the following screen appears. Note that there is only one filter rule in this set.

Port #= 23

Port # Comp= Equal

Source: IP Addr= 0.0.0.0

IP Mask= 0.0.0.0

Port #=

Port # Comp= Equal

TCP Estab= No

More= No Log= None

Action Matched= Drop

Action Not Matched= Forward

Menu 21.6.1 - TCP/IP Filter Rule

Filter #: 6,1

Filter Type= TCP/IP Filter Rule

Active= Yes

IP Protocol= 6 IP Source Route= No

Destination: IP Addr= 0.0.0.0

IP Mask= 0.0.0.0

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

There are no more rules to check.

Select

Equal

here as we are looking for packets going to port 23 only.

Press [SPACE BAR] to choose this filter rule type. The first filter rule type determines all subsequent filter types within a set.

Select

Yes

to make the rule active.

6

is the TCP protocol.

The port number for the telnet service (TCP protocol) is

23

. See

RFC-1060 for port numbers of wellknown services.

Select

Drop

here so that the packet will be dropped if its destination is the telnet port.

Select

Forward

here so that the packet will be forwarded if its destination is not the telnet port and there are no more rules in this filter set to check. Select

Next

if there are more rules to check.

Figure 22-12 Menu 21.6.1 Sample Filter

22-16 Filter Configuration

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 21.6 - Filter Rules Summary

# A Type Filter Rules M m n

- - ---- --------------------------------------------------------------- - - -

1 Y IP Pr=6, SA=0.0.0.0, DA=0.0.0.0, DP=23 N D F

2 N

3 N

4 N

5 N

6 N

Enter Filter Rule Number (1-6) to Configure: 1

This shows you that you have configured and activated (

A = Y

) a

TCP/IP filter rule (

Type = IP

,

Pr = 6

) for destination telnet ports (

DP =

23

).

M = N

means an action can be taken immediately.

The action is to drop the packet (

m = D

) if the action is matched and to forward the packet immediately (

n = F

) if the action is not matched no matter whether there are more rules to be checked (there aren’t in this example).

Figure 22-13 Menu 21.6 Sample Filter Rules Summary

After you have created the filter set, you must apply it.

Step 1.

Enter 11 in the main menu to display menu 11 and type the remote node number to edit.

Step 2.

Go to the

Edit Filter Sets

field, press [SPACE BAR] to choose

Yes

and press [ENTER] .

Step 3.

This brings you to menu 11.5. Apply the example filter set (for example, filter set 3) in this menu as shown in the next section.

22.7 Applying Filters and Factory Defaults

This section shows you where to apply the filter(s) after you design it (them). Sets of factory default filter rules have been configured in menu 21 (but have not been applied) to filter traffic.

Filter Configuration 22-17

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 22-5 Filter Sets Table

FILTER SETS DESCRIPTION

Input Filter Sets: Apply filters for incoming traffic. You may apply protocol or device filter rules. See earlier in this chapter for information on filters.

Output Filter Sets: Apply filters for traffic leaving the Prestige. You may apply filter rules for protocol or device filters. See earlier in this section for information on types of filters.

Call Filter Sets: Apply filters to decide if a packet should be allowed to trigger a call.

22.7.1 Ethernet Traffic

You seldom need to filter Ethernet traffic; however, the filter sets may be useful to block certain packets, reduce traffic and prevent security breaches. Go to menu 3.1 (shown next) and type the number(s) of the filter set(s) that you want to apply as appropriate. You can choose up to four filter sets (from twelve) by typing their numbers separated by commas, for example, 3, 4, 6, 11. The factory default filter set,

NetBIOS_LAN, is inserted in the

protocol filters

field under

Input Filter Sets

in menu 3.1 in order to prevent local NetBIOS messages from triggering calls to the DNS server.

Menu 3.1 – LAN Port Filter Setup

Input Filter Sets: protocol filters= device filters=

Output Filter Sets:

3 protocol filters= device filters=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Apply filter 3 to block NETBIOS traffic from the

LAN.

Figure 22-14 Filtering Ethernet Traffic

22.7.2 Remote Node Filters

Go to menu 11.5 (shown next) and type the number(s) of the filter set(s) as appropriate. You can cascade up to four filter sets by typing their numbers separated by commas. The factory default filter set,

NetBIOS_WAN, is inserted in the

protocol filters

field under

Call Filter Sets

in menu 11.5 to block local

NetBIOS traffic from triggering calls to the ISP.

22-18 Filter Configuration

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 11.5 - Remote Node Filter

Input Filter Sets:

protocol filters= 6

device filters=

Output Filter Sets:

protocol filters= 2

device filters=

Call Filter Sets:

Protocol filters=

Device filters=

Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL:

Apply filter 6 to block

Tel, FTP and Web traffic from the WAN.

Apply filter 2 to block

NETBIOS traffic to the WAN.

Figure 22-15 Filtering Remote Node Traffic

Note that call filter sets are visible when you select PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation.

Filter Configuration 22-19

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 23

SNMP Configuration

This chapter explains SNMP Configuration menu 22.

23.1 About SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. SNMP is a member of the TCP/IP protocol suite. Your Prestige supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Prestige through the network. The

Prestige supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and version two c (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. SNMP is only available if TCP/IP is configured.

Figure 23-1 SNMP Management Model

An SNMP managed network consists of two main components: agents and a manager.

SNMP Configuration 23-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the Prestige). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP.

The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions.

It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices.

The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include the number of packets received, node port status etc.

A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects.

SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:

Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.

GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In

SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.

Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.

Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.

23.2 Supported MIBs

The Prestige supports RFC-1215 and MIB II as defined in RFC-1213 as well as ZyXEL private MIBs. The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistic data and monitor status and performance.

23.3 SNMP Configuration

To configure SNMP, select option 22 from the main menu to open

Menu 22 — SNMP Configuration

as shown next. The “community” for Get, Set and Trap fields is SNMP terminology for password.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 22 - SNMP Configuration

SNMP:

Get Community= public

Set Community= public

Trusted Host= 0.0.0.0

Trap:

Community= public

Destination= 0.0.0.0

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 23-2 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration

The following table describes the SNMP configuration parameters.

Table 23-1 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration

SNMP:

Get Community

Set Community

Type the

Get Community

, which is the password for the incoming

Get- and GetNext requests from the management station.

Type the

Set

community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station.

Trusted Host If you enter a trusted host, your Prestige will only respond to SNMP messages from this address. A blank (default) field means your

Prestige will respond to all SNMP messages it receives, regardless of source.

Trap:

Community Type the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager.

Destination Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to. public public

0.0.0.0 public

0.0.0.0

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

SNMP Configuration 23-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

23.4 SNMP Traps

The Prestige will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs:

Table 23-2 SNMP Traps

TRAP # TRAP NAME

1 coldStart )

6 whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-

MIB)

DESCRIPTION

A trap is sent after booting (power on).

2 warmStart ) A trap is sent after booting (software reboot).

3 linkDown ) A trap is sent with the port number when any of the links are down. See the following table.

4 linkUp ) A trap is sent with the port number.

5 authenticationFailure

RFC-1215

)

A trap is sent to the manager when receiving any SNMP gets or sets requirements with wrong community

(password).

A trap is sent with the reason of restart before rebooting when the system is going to restart (warm start).

6a For intentional reboot : A trap is sent with the message "System reboot by user!" if reboot is done intentionally, (for example, download new files, CI command "sys reboot", etc.).

The port number is its interface index under the interface group.

Table 23-3 Ports and Permanent Virtual Circuits

PORT PVC (PERMANENT VIRTUAL CIRCUIT)

2 1

3 2

… …

13 12

14 xDSL

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 24

System Information and Diagnosis

This chapter covers the information and diagnostic tools in SMT menus 24.1 to 24.4.

These tools include updates on system status, port status, log and trace capabilities and upgrades for the system software. This chapter describes how to use these tools in detail.

Type 24 in the main menu to open

Menu 24

System Maintenance

, as shown in the following figure.

Menu 24 - System Maintenance

1. System Status

2. System Information and Console Port Speed

3. Log and Trace

4. Diagnostic

5. Backup Configuration

6. Restore Configuration

7. Upload Firmware

8. Command Interpreter Mode

Control

10. Time and Date Setting

11. Remote Management

Enter Menu Selection Number:

Figure 24-1 Menu 24 System Maintenance

24.1 System Status

The first selection, System Status gives you information on the status and statistics of the ports, as shown next. System Status is a tool that can be used to monitor your Prestige. Specifically, it gives you information on your ADSL telephone line status, number of packets sent and received.

To get to System Status, type 24 to go to

Menu 24

System Maintenance.

From this menu, type 1

.

System Status

. There are two commands in

Menu 24.1

System Maintenance

Status

. Entering 1 resets the counters; [ESC] takes you back to the previous screen.

The following table describes the fields present in

Menu 24.1

System Maintenance

Status

which are read-only and meant for diagnostic purposes.

System Information and Diagnosis 24-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 24.1 - System Maintenance - Status 02:19:33

Sat. Jan. 01, 2000

Node-Lnk Status TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx B/s Rx B/s Up Time

1-PPPoE Idle 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00

2 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00

3 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00

4 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00

5 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00

6 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00

7 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00

8 N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0:00:00

My WAN IP (from ISP): 0.0.0.0

Ethernet: WAN:

Status: 100M/Full Duplex Tx Pkts: 1683 Line Status: Down

Collisions: 0 Rx Pkts: 2640 Upstream Speed: 0 kbps

CPU Load = 1.67% Downstream Speed: 0 kbps

Press Command:

COMMANDS: 1-Reset Counters ESC-Exit

Figure 24-2 Menu 24.1 System Maintenance : Status

The following table describes the fields present in

Menu 24.1

System Maintenance

Status

.

Table 24-1 Menu 24.1 System Maintenance : Status

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Node-Lnk This is the node index number and link type. Link types are: PPP, ENET, 1483.

Status This shows the status of the remote node.

TxPkts

RxPkts

Errors

Tx B/s

The number of transmitted packets to this remote node.

The number of received packets from this remote node.

The number of error packets on this connection.

This shows the transmission rate in bytes per second.

Rx B/s

Up Time

My WAN IP

(from ISP)

This shows the receiving rate in bytes per second.

This is the time this channel has been connected to the current remote node.

This is the IP address of the ISP remote node.

Ethernet This shows statistics for the LAN.

Status This shows the current status of the LAN.

24-2 System Information and Diagnosis

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 24-1 Menu 24.1 System Maintenance : Status

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Tx Pkts This is the number of transmitted packets to the LAN.

Rx Pkts This is the number of received packets from the LAN.

Collision This is the number of collisions.

WAN This shows statistics for the WAN.

Line Status This shows the current status of the xDSL line, which can be Up or Down.

Upstream

Speed

This shows the upstream transfer rate in kbps.

Downstream

Speed

CPU Load

This shows the downstream transfer rate in kbps.

This specifies the percentage of CPU utilization.

24.2 System Information

To get to the System Information:

Step 1.

Enter 24 to display

Menu 24

System Maintenance

.

Step 2.

Enter 2 to display

Menu 24.2

System Information and Console Port Speed

.

Step 3.

From this menu you have two choices as shown in the next figure:

Menu 24.2 - System Information and Console Port Speed

1. System Information

2. Console Port Speed

Please enter selection:

Figure 24-3 Menu 24.2 System Information and Console Port Speed

The Prestige has an internal console port for support personnel only. Do not open the Prestige as it will void your warranty.

24.2.1 System Information

Enter 1 in menu 24.2 to display the screen shown next.

System Information and Diagnosis 24-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 24.2.1 - System Maintenance - Information

Name:

Routing: IP

ZyNOS F/W Version: V3.40(QG.0)b2 | 2/23/2004

ADSL Chipset Vendor: TI AR7 01.01.00.00

Standard: Multi-Mode

LAN

Ethernet Address: 00:a0:c5:77:90:8b

IP Address: 192.168.1.1

IP Mask: 255.255.255.0

DHCP: Server

Press ESC or RETURN to Exit:

Figure 24-4 Menu 24.2.1 System Maintenance : Information

The following table describes the fields in this menu.

Table 24-2 Menu 24.2.1 System Maintenance : Information

Name

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Displays the system name of your Prestige. This information can be changed in

Menu 1 – General Setup

.

Routing

ZyNOS F/W Version

Refers to the routing protocol used.

Refers to the ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) system firmware version. ZyNOS is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications

Corporation.

ADSL Chipset Vendor Displays the vendor of the ADSL chipset and DSL version.

Standard This refers to the operational protocol the Prestige and the DSLAM (Digital

Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer) are using.

LAN

Ethernet Address Refers to the Ethernet MAC (Media Access Control) of your Prestige.

IP Address This is the IP address of the Prestige in dotted decimal notation.

IP Mask This shows the subnet mask of the Prestige.

DHCP This field shows the DHCP setting (None, Relay or Server) of the Prestige.

24-4 System Information and Diagnosis

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

24.2.2 Console Port Speed

You can set up different port speeds for the console port through

Menu 24.2.2 – System Maintenance –

Console Port Speed

. Your Prestige supports 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 bps. Press

[ SPACE BAR ] and then [ENTER] to select the desired speed in menu 24.2.2, as shown in the following figure.

Menu 24.2.2 – System Maintenance – Change Console Port Speed

Console Port Speed: 9600

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 24-5 Menu 24.2.2 System Maintenance : Change Console Port Speed

Once you change the Prestige consol port speed, you must also set the speed parameter for the communication software you are using to connect to the

Prestige.

24.3 Log and Trace

There are two logging facilities in the Prestige. The first is the error logs and trace records that are stored locally. The second is the UNIX syslog facility for message logging.

24.3.1 Viewing Error Log

The first place you should look for clues when something goes wrong is the error log. Follow the procedures to view the local error/trace log:

Step 1.

Type 24 in the main menu to display

Menu 24

System Maintenance

.

Step 2.

From menu 24, type 3 to display

Menu 24.3

System Maintenance

Log and Trace

.

Menu 24.3 - System Maintenance - Log and Trace

1. View Error Log

2. UNIX Syslog

Please enter selection

Figure 24-6 Menu 24.3 System Maintenance : Log and Trace

System Information and Diagnosis 24-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Step 3.

Enter 1 from

Menu 24.3

System Maintenance

Log and Trace

to display the error log in the system.

After the Prestige finishes displaying the error log, you will have the option to clear it. Samples of typical error and information messages are presented in the next figure.

58 Sat Jan 01 02:16:07 2000 PP0a -WARN SNMP TRAP 3: link up

59 Sat Jan 01 02:16:07 2000 PP10 WARN netMakeChannDial: err=-3001 rn_p=94441328

60 Sat Jan 01 02:16:39 2000 PP12 WARN Last errorlog repeat 6 Times

61 Sat Jan 01 02:16:39 2000 PP12 INFO SMT Password pass

62 Sat Jan 01 02:16:39 2000 PP01 INFO SMT Session Begin

63 Sat Jan 01 02:17:24 2000 PP10 WARN netMakeChannDial: err=-3001 rn_p=94441328

Clear Error Log (y/n):

Figure 24-7 Sample Error and Information Messages

24.3.2 Syslog and Accounting

The Prestige uses the UNIX syslog facility to log the CDR (Call Detail Record) and system messages to a syslog server. Syslog and accounting can be configured in

Menu 24.3.2

System Maintenance

UNIX

Syslog

, as shown next.

Menu 24.3.2 - System Maintenance - UNIX Syslog

UNIX Syslog:

Active= No

Syslog IP Address= ?

Log Facility= Local 1

Types:

CDR= No

Packet Triggered= No

Filter Log= No

PPP Log= No

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 24-8 Menu 24.3.2 System Maintenance : Syslog and Accounting

You need to configure the UNIX syslog parameters described in the following table to activate syslog then choose what you want to log.

Table 24-3 Menu 24.3.2 System Maintenance : Syslog and Accounting

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

UNIX Syslog:

24-6 System Information and Diagnosis

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 24-3 Menu 24.3.2 System Maintenance : Syslog and Accounting

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Active Use [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to turn syslog on or off.

Syslog IP Address Type the IP address of your syslog server.

Log Facility Use [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select one of seven different local options.

The log facility lets you log the message in different server files. Refer to your UNIX manual.

Types:

CDR Call Detail Record (CDR) logs all data phone line activity if set to

Yes

.

Packet Triggered The first 48 bytes or octets and protocol type of the triggering packet is sent to the

UNIX syslog server when this field is set to

Yes

.

Filter Log No filters are logged when this field is set to

No

. Filters with the individual filter Log

Filter field set to

Yes

are logged when this field is set to

Yes

.

PPP Log PPP events are logged when this field is set to

Yes

.

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

The following are examples of the four types of syslog messages sent by the Prestige:

1 - CDR

SdcmdSyslogSend ( SYSLOG_CDR, SYSLOG_INFO, String);

String = board xx line xx channel xx, call xx, str board = the hardware board ID line = the WAN ID in a board

Channel = channel ID within the WAN call = the call reference number which starts from 1 and increments by 1 for each new call str = C01 Outgoing Call dev xx ch xx (dev:device No. ch:channel No.)

C01 Incoming Call xxxxBps xxxxx (L2TP, xxxxx = Remote Call ID)

C01 Incoming Call xxxx (= connected speed) xxxxx (= Remote Call ID)

L02 Tunnel Connected (L2TP)

C02 OutCall Connected xxxx (= connected speed) xxxxx (= Remote Call ID)

C02 CLID call refused

L02 Call Terminated

C02 Call Terminated

Jul 19 11:19:27 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: board 0 line 0 channel 0, call 1, C01 Outgoing Call dev=2 ch=0

40002

Jul 19 11:19:32 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: board 0 line 0 channel 0, call 1, C02 OutCall Connected 64000

40002

Jul 19 11:20:06 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: board 0 line 0 channel 0, call 1, C02 Call Terminated

2 - Packet Triggered

SdcmdSyslogSend (SYSLOG_PKTTRI, SYSLOG_NOTICE, String);

String = Packet trigger: Protocol=xx Data=xxxxxxxxxx…..x

Protocol: (1:IP 2:IPX 3:IPXHC 4:BPDU 5:ATALK 6:IPNG)

Data: We will send forty-eight Hex characters to the server

Jul 19 11:28:39 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: Packet Trigger: Protocol=1,

System Information and Diagnosis 24-7

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Data=4500003c100100001f010004c0a86614ca849a7b08004a5c020001006162636465666768696a6b6c6d6e6f70717273

74

Jul 19 11:28:56 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: Packet Trigger: Protocol=1,

Data=4500002c1b0140001f06b50ec0a86614ca849a7b0427001700195b3e00000000600220008cd40000020405b4

Jul 19 11:29:06 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: Packet Trigger: Protocol=1,

Data=45000028240140001f06ac12c0a86614ca849a7b0427001700195b451d1430135004000077600000

3 - Filter Log

SdcmdSyslogSend (SYSLOG_FILLOG, SYSLOG_NOTICE, String);

String = IP[Src=xx.xx.xx.xx Dst=xx.xx.xx.xx prot spo=xxxx dpo=xxxx] S04>R01mD

IP[…] is the packet header and S04>R01mD means filter set 4 (S) and rule 1 (R), match (m), drop

(D).

Src: Source Address

Dst: Destination Address prot: Protocol (“TCP”, ”UDP”, ”ICMP”) spo: Source port dpo: Destination port

Jul 19 14:43:55 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: IP [Src=202.132.154.123 Dst=255.255.255.255 UDP spo=0208 dpo=0208]} S03>R01mF

Jul 19 14:44:00 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: IP [Src=192.168.102.20 Dst=202.132.154.1 UDP spo=05d4 dpo=0035]} S03>R01mF

Jul 19 14:44:04 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: IP [Src=192.168.102.20 Dst=202.132.154.1 UDP spo=05d4 dpo=0035]} S03>R01mF

4 - PPP Log

SdcmdSyslogSend (SYSLOG_PPPLOG, SYSLOG_NOTICE, String);

String = ppp:Proto Starting / ppp:Proto Opening / ppp:Proto Closing / ppp:Proto Shutdown

Proto = LCP / ATCP / BACP / BCP / CBCP / CCP / CHAP/ PAP / IPCP / IPXCP

Jul 19 11:42:44 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: ppp:LCP Closing

Jul 19 11:42:49 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: ppp:IPCP Closing

Jul 19 11:42:54 192.168.102.2 ZYXEL: ppp:CCP Closing

24.4 Diagnostic

The diagnostic facility allows you to test the different aspects of your Prestige to determine if it is working properly. Menu 24.4 allows you to choose among various types of diagnostic tests to evaluate your system, as shown in the following figure.

Follow the procedure next to get to Diagnostic:

Step 1.

From the main menu, type 24 to open

Menu 24 – System Maintenance

.

Step 2.

From this menu, type 4. Diagnostic to open

Menu 24.4

System Maintenance

Diagnostic

.

24-8 System Information and Diagnosis

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 24.4 - System Maintenance - Diagnostic

xDSL System

1. Reset xDSL 21. Reboot System

22. Command Mode

TCP/IP

12. Ping Host

Enter Menu Selection Number:

Host IP Address= N/A

Figure 24-9 Menu 24.4 System Maintenance : Diagnostic

The following table describes the diagnostic tests available in menu 24.4 for and the connections.

Table 24-4 Menu 24.4 System Maintenance Menu : Diagnostic

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Reset xDSL Re-initialize the xDSL link to the telephone company.

Ping Host

Reboot System

Ping the host to see if the links and TCP/IP protocol on both systems are working.

Reboot the Prestige.

Command Mode Type the mode to test and diagnose your Prestige using specified commands.

Host IP Address If you typed 12 to Ping Host, now type the address of the computer you want to ping.

System Information and Diagnosis 24-9

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 25

Firmware and Configuration File

Maintenance

This chapter tells you how to backup and restore your configuration file as well as upload new firmware and configuration files.

25.1 Filename Conventions

The configuration file (often called the romfile or rom-0) contains the factory default settings in the menus such as password, DHCP Setup, TCP/IP Setup, etc. It arrives from ZyXEL with a “rom” filename extension.

Once you have customized the Prestige's settings, they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing.

ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the “ras” file) is the system firmware and has a “bin” filename extension. With many FTP and TFTP clients, the filenames are similar to those seen next.

Only use firmware for your Prestige’s specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Prestige.

ftp> put firmware.bin ras

This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file " firmware.bin" to the Prestige. ftp> get rom-0 config.cfg

This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to the computer file “config.cfg”.

If your (T)FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source, you will need to rename them as the Prestige only recognizes “rom-0” and “ras”. Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use.

The following table is a summary. Please note that the internal filename refers to the filename on the Prestige and the external filename refers to the filename not on the Prestige, that is, on your computer, local network or FTP site and so the name (but not the extension) may vary. After uploading new firmware, see the

ZyNOS

F/W Version

field in

Menu 24.2.1 – System Maintenance – Information

to confirm that you have uploaded the correct firmware version. The AT command is the command you enter after you press “y” when prompted in the SMT menu to go into debug mode.

Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 25-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

FILE TYPE

Configuration

File

Firmware

Table 25-1 Filename Conventions

INTERNAL NAME

Rom-0

Ras

EXTERNAL NAME

This is the configuration filename on the Prestige.

Uploading the rom-0 file replaces the entire ROM file system, including your Prestige configurations, system-related data (including the default password), the error log and the trace log.

This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the Prestige.

DESCRIPTION

*.rom

*.bin

25.2 Backup Configuration

Option 5 from

Menu 24 – System Maintenance

allows you to backup the current Prestige configuration to your computer. Backup is highly recommended once your Prestige is functioning properly. FTP is the preferred methods for backing up your current configuration to your computer since they are faster. Any serial communications program should work fine; however, you must use Xmodem protocol to perform the download/upload and you don’t have to rename the files.

Please note that terms “download” and “upload” are relative to the computer. Download means to transfer from the Prestige to the computer, while upload means from your computer to the Prestige.

25.2.1 Backup Configuration

Follow the instructions as shown in the next screen.

Menu 24.5 - System Maintenance - Backup Configuration

To transfer the configuration file to your workstation, follow the procedure below:

1. Launch the FTP client on your workstation.

2. Type "open" and the IP address of your Prestige. Then type "root" and

SMT password as requested.

3. Locate the 'rom-0' file.

4. Type 'get rom-0' to back up the current Prestige configuration to

your workstation.

For details on FTP commands, please consult the documentation of your FTP client program. For details on backup using TFTP (note that you must remain in this menu to back up using TFTP), please see your Prestige manual.

Press ENTER to Exit:

Figure 25-1 Telnet in Menu 24.5

25-2 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

25.2.2 Using the FTP Command from the Command Line

Step 1.

Launch the FTP client on your computer.

Step 2.

Enter “open”, followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige.

Step 3.

Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username.

Step 4.

Enter your password as requested (the default is “1234”).

Step 5.

Enter “bin” to set transfer mode to binary.

Step 6.

Use “get” to transfer files from the Prestige to the computer, for example, “get rom-0 config.rom” transfers the configuration file on the Prestige to your computer and renames it “config.rom”. See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions.

Step 7.

Enter “quit” to exit the ftp prompt.

25.2.3 Example of FTP Commands from the Command Line

331 Enter PASS command

Password:

230 Logged in ftp> bin

200 Type I OK ftp> get rom-0 zyxel.rom

200 Port command okay

150 Opening data connection for STOR ras

226 File received OK ftp: 16384 bytes sent in 1.10Seconds 297.89Kbytes/sec. ftp> quit

Figure 25-2 FTP Session Example

25.2.4 GUI-based FTP Clients

The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI-based FTP clients.

Table 25-2 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients

COMMAND DESCRIPTION

Host Address Enter the address of the host server.

Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 25-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 25-2 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients

COMMAND DESCRIPTION

Login Type Anonymous.

This is when a user I.D. and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access. Anonymous logins will work only if your

ISP or service administrator has enabled this option.

Normal.

Transfer Type

The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login.

Transfer files in either ASCII (plain text format) or in binary mode.

Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode.

Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory (path).

Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory (path).

25.2.5 TFTP and FTP over WAN Management Limitations

TFTP, FTP and Telnet over WAN will not work when:

1. You have disabled Telnet service in menu 24.11.

2. You have applied a filter in menu 3.1 (LAN) or in menu 11.5 (WAN) to block Telnet service.

3. The IP address in the

Secured Client IP

field in menu 24.11 does not match the client IP. If it does not match, the Prestige will disconnect the Telnet session immediately.

4. You have an SMT console session running.

25.2.6 Backup Configuration Using TFTP

The Prestige supports the up/downloading of the firmware and the configuration file using TFTP (Trivial File

Transfer Protocol) over LAN. Although TFTP should work over WAN as well, it is not recommended.

To use TFTP, your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients. To backup the configuration file, follow the procedure shown next.

Step 1.

Use telnet from your computer to connect to the Prestige and log in. Because TFTP does not have any security checks, the Prestige records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address.

Step 2.

Put the SMT in command interpreter (CI) mode by entering 8 in

Menu 24

System

Maintenance

.

25-4 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Step 3.

Enter command “sys stdio 0” to disable the SMT timeout, so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted. Enter command “sys stdio 5” to restore the five-minute SMT timeout (default) when the file transfer is complete.

Step 4.

Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the Prestige. Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer.

Step 5.

Use the TFTP client (see the example below) to transfer files between the Prestige and the computer. The file name for the configuration file is “rom-0” (rom-zero, not capital o).

Note that the telnet connection must be active and the SMT in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer.

For details on TFTP commands (see following example), please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program. For UNIX, use “get” to transfer from the Prestige to the computer and “binary” to set binary transfer mode.

25.2.7 TFTP Command Example

The following is an example TFTP command: tftp [-i] host get rom-0 config.rom where “i” specifies binary image transfer mode (use this mode when transferring binary files), “host” is the

Prestige IP address, “get” transfers the file source on the Prestige (rom-0, name of the configuration file on the Prestige) to the file destination on the computer and renames it config.rom.

25.2.8 GUI-based TFTP Clients

The following table describes some of the fields that you may see in GUI-based TFTP clients.

Table 25-3 General Commands for GUI-based TFTP Clients

COMMAND DESCRIPTION

Host Enter the IP address of the Prestige. 192.168.1.1 is the Prestige’s default IP address when shipped.

Send/Fetch Use “Send” to upload the file to the Prestige and “Fetch” to back up the file on your computer.

Local File Enter the path and name of the firmware file (*.bin extension) or configuration file (*.rom extension) on your computer.

Remote File This is the filename on the Prestige. The filename for the firmware is “ras” and for the configuration file, is “rom-0”.

Binary

Abort

Transfer the file in binary mode.

Stop transfer of the file.

Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 25-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Refer to

section 25.2.5

to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN.

25.3 Restore Configuration

This section shows you how to restore a previously saved configuration. Note that this function erases the current configuration before restoring a previous back up configuration; please do not attempt to restore unless you have a backup configuration file stored on disk.

FTP is the preferred method for restoring your current computer configuration to your Prestige since FTP is faster. Please note that you must wait for the system to automatically restart after the file transfer is complete.

WARNING!

DO NOT INTERRUPT THE FILE TRANSFER PROCESS AS THIS MAY

PERMANENTLY DAMAGE YOUR PRESTIGE.

25.3.1 Restore Using FTP

For details about backup using (T)FTP please refer to earlier sections on FTP and TFTP file upload in this chapter.

Menu 24.6 -- System Maintenance - Restore Configuration

To transfer the firmware and configuration file to your workstation, follow the procedure below:

1. Launch the FTP client on your workstation.

2. Type "open" and the IP address of your Prestige. Then type "root" and

SMT password as requested.

3. Type "put backupfilename rom-0" where backupfilename is the name of

your backup configuration file on your workstation and rom-0 is the

remote file name on the Prestige. This restores the configuration to

your Prestige.

4. The system reboots automatically after a successful file transfer

For details on FTP commands, please consult the documentation of your FTP client program. For details on backup using TFTP (note that you must remain in this menu to back up using TFTP), please see your Prestige manual.

Press ENTER to Exit:

Figure 25-3 Telnet into Menu 24.6

Step 1.

Launch the FTP client on your computer.

Step 2.

Enter “open”, followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige.

Step 3.

Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username.

25-6 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Step 4.

Enter your password as requested (the default is “1234”).

Step 5.

Enter “bin” to set transfer mode to binary.

Step 6.

Find the “rom” file (on your computer) that you want to restore to your Prestige.

Step 7.

Use “put” to transfer files from the Prestige to the computer, for example, “put config.rom rom-0” transfers the configuration file “config.rom” on your computer to the Prestige. See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions.

Step 8.

Enter “quit” to exit the ftp prompt. The Prestige will automatically restart after a successful restore process.

25.3.2 Restore Using FTP Session Example

ftp> put config.rom rom-0

200 Port command okay

150 Opening data connection for STOR rom-0

226 File received OK

221 Goodbye for writing flash ftp: 16384 bytes sent in 0.06Seconds 273.07Kbytes/sec. ftp>quit

Figure 25-4 Restore Using FTP Session Example

Refer to

section 25.2.5

to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN.

25.4 Uploading Firmware and Configuration Files

This section shows you how to upload firmware and configuration files. You can upload configuration files by following the procedure in the previous

Restore Configuration

section or by following the instructions in

Menu 24.7.2 – System Maintenance – Upload System Configuration File

.

WARNING!

DO NOT INTERRUPT THE FILE TRANSFER PROCESS AS THIS MAY

PERMANENTLY DAMAGE YOUR PRESTIGE.

25.4.1 Firmware File Upload

FTP is the preferred method for uploading the firmware and configuration. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client.

When you telnet into the Prestige, you will see the following screens for uploading firmware and the configuration file using FTP.

Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 25-7

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 24.7.1 - System Maintenance - Upload System Firmware

To upload the system firmware, follow the procedure below:

1. Launch the FTP client on your workstation.

2. Type "open" and the IP address of your system. Then type "root" and

SMT password as requested.

3. Type "put firmware filename ras" where "firmwarefilename" is the name

of your firmware upgrade file on your workstation and "ras" is the

remote file name on the system.

4. The system reboots automatically after a successful firmware upload.

For details on FTP commands, please consult the documentation of your FTP client program. For details on uploading system firmware using TFTP (note that you must remain on this menu to upload system firmware using TFTP), please see your manual.

Press ENTER to Exit:

Figure 25-5 Telnet Into Menu 24.7.1 Upload System Firmware

25.4.2 Configuration File Upload

You see the following screen when you telnet into menu 24.7.2.

Menu 24.7.2 - System Maintenance - Upload System Configuration File

To upload the system configuration file, follow the procedure below:

1. Launch the FTP client on your workstation.

2. Type "open" and the IP address of your system. Then type "root" and

SMT password as requested.

3. Type "put configuration filename rom-0" where "configurationfilename"

is the name of your system configuration file on your workstation, which

will be transferred to the "rom-0" file on the system.

4. The system reboots automatically after the upload system configuration

file process is complete.

For details on FTP commands, please consult the documentation of your FTP client program. For details on uploading system firmware using TFTP (note that you must remain on this menu to upload system firmware using TFTP), please see your manual.

Press ENTER to Exit:

Figure 25-6 Telnet Into Menu 24.7.2 System Maintenance

To upload the firmware and the configuration file, follow these examples

25-8 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

25.4.3 FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example

Step 1.

Launch the FTP client on your computer.

Step 2.

Enter “open”, followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige.

Step 3.

Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username.

Step 4.

Enter your password as requested (the default is “1234”).

Step 5.

Enter “bin” to set transfer mode to binary.

Step 6.

Use “put” to transfer files from the computer to the Prestige, for example, “put firmware.bin ras” transfers the firmware on your computer (firmware.bin) to the Prestige and renames it “ras”.

Similarly, “put config.rom rom-0” transfers the configuration file on your computer (config.rom) to the Prestige and renames it “rom-0”. Likewise “get rom-0 config.rom” transfers the configuration file on the Prestige to your computer and renames it “config.rom.” See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions.

Step 7.

Enter “quit” to exit the ftp prompt.

The Prestige automatically restarts after a successful file upload.

25.4.4 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload

331 Enter PASS command

Password:

230 Logged in ftp> bin

200 Type I OK ftp> put firmware.bin ras

200 Port command okay

150 Opening data connection for STOR ras

226 File received OK ftp: 1103936 bytes sent in 1.10Seconds 297.89Kbytes/sec. ftp> quit

Figure 25-7 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload

More commands (found in GUI-based FTP clients) are listed earlier in this chapter.

Refer to

section 25.2.5

to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN.

25.4.5 TFTP File Upload

The Prestige also supports the uploading of firmware files using TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) over

LAN. Although TFTP should work over WAN as well, it is not recommended.

Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 25-9

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

To use TFTP, your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients. To transfer the firmware and the configuration file, follow the procedure shown next.

Step 1.

Use telnet from your computer to connect to the Prestige and log in. Because TFTP does not have any security checks, the Prestige records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address.

Step 2.

Put the SMT in command interpreter (CI) mode by entering 8 in

Menu 24 – System

Maintenance

.

Step 3.

Enter the command “sys stdio 0” to disable the console timeout, so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted. Enter “command sys stdio 5” to restore the five-minute console timeout (default) when the file transfer is complete.

Step 4.

Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the Prestige. Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer.

Step 5.

Use the TFTP client (see the example below) to transfer files between the Prestige and the computer. The file name for the firmware is “ras”.

Note that the telnet connection must be active and the Prestige in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer. For details on TFTP commands (see following example), please consult the documentation of your

TFTP client program. For UNIX, use “get” to transfer from the Prestige to the computer, “put” the other way around, and “binary” to set binary transfer mode.

25.4.6 TFTP Upload Command Example

The following is an example TFTP command: tftp [-i] host put firmware.bin ras where “i” specifies binary image transfer mode (use this mode when transferring binary files), “host” is the

Prestige’s IP address and “put” transfers the file source on the computer (firmware.bin – name of the firmware on the computer) to the file destination on the remote host (ras - name of the firmware on the

Prestige).

Commands that you may see in GUI-based TFTP clients are listed earlier in this chapter.

25-10 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 26

System Maintenance

This chapter leads you through SMT menus 24.8 to 24.10.

26.1 Command Interpreter Mode

The Command Interpreter (CI) is a part of the main system firmware. The CI provides much of the same functionality as the SMT, while adding some low-level setup and diagnostic functions. Enter the CI from the

SMT by selecting menu 24.8. See the included disk or the zyxel.com web site for more detailed information on CI commands. Enter 8 from

Menu 24 — System Maintenance

. A list of valid commands can be found by typing help

or

?

at the command prompt. Type “exit” to return to the SMT main menu when finished.

Menu 24 - System Maintenance

1. System Status

2. System Information and Console Port Speed

3. Log and Trace

4. Diagnostic

5. Backup Configuration

6. Restore Configuration

7. Upload Firmware

8. Command Interpreter Mode

9. Call Control

10. Time and Date Setting

11. Remote Management

Enter Menu Selection Number:

Figure 26-1 Command Mode in Menu 24

System Maintenance 26-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Copyright (c) 1994 - 2004 ZyXEL Communications Corp. ras> ?

Valid commands are: sys exit ether wan ip bridge lan ras>

Figure 26-2 Valid Commands

26.2 Call Control Support

Call Control Support is only applicable when

Encapsulation

is set to

PPPoE

in menu 4 or menu 11.1.

The budget management function allows you to set a limit on the total outgoing call time of the Prestige within certain times. When the total outgoing call time exceeds the limit, the current call will be dropped and any future outgoing calls will be blocked.

To access the call control menu, select option 9 in menu 24 to go to

Menu 24.9 — System Maintenance —

Call Control

, as shown in the next table.

Menu 24.9 - System Maintenance - Call Control

Enter Menu Selection Number:

Figure 26-3 Menu 24.9 System Maintenance : Call Control

26.2.1 Budget Management

Menu 24.9.1 shows the budget management statistics for outgoing calls. Enter 1 from

Menu 24.9 — System

Maintenance — Call Control

to bring up the following menu.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Remote Node

1.MyIsp

2.--------

3.--------

4.--------

5.--------

6.--------

7.--------

8.--------

Menu 24.9.1 - System Maintenance - Budget Management

Connection Time/Total Budget

No Budget

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

Elapsed Time/Total Period

Reset Node (0 to update screen):

No Budget

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

Figure 26-4 Menu 24.9.1 System Maintenance : Budget Management

The total budget is the time limit on the accumulated time for outgoing calls to a remote node. When this limit is reached, the call will be dropped and further outgoing calls to that remote node will be blocked. After each period, the total budget is reset. The default for the total budget is 0 minutes and the period is 0 hours, meaning no budget control. You can reset the accumulated connection time in this menu by entering the index of a remote node. Enter 0 to update the screen. The budget and the reset period can be configured in menu 11.1 for the remote node when PPPoE encapsulation is selected.

Table 26-1 Menu 24.9.1 System Maintenance : Budget Management

Remote Node

Connection Time/Total

Budget

Elapsed Time/Total

Period

Enter the index number of the remote node you want to reset (just one in this case)

This is the total connection time that has gone by

(within the allocated budget that you set in menu

11.1.

The period is the time cycle in hours that the allocation budget is reset (see menu 11.1.) The elapsed time is the time used up within this period.

1

5/10 means that 5 minutes out of a total allocation of 10 minutes have lapsed.

0.5/1 means that 30 minutes out of the 1 hour time period has lapsed.

Enter “0” to update the screen or press [ESC] to return to the previous screen.

System Maintenance 26-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

26.3 Time and Date Setting

The Prestige keeps track of the time and date. There is also a software mechanism to set the time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Prestige. Menu 24.10 allows you to update the time and date settings of your Prestige.

The real time is then displayed in the Prestige error logs.

Select menu 24 in the main menu to open

Menu 24 System Maintenance

, as shown next.

Menu 24 - System Maintenance

Status

2. System

3. Log and Trace

4. Diagnostic

5. Backup

6. Restore Configuration

7. Upload Firmware

8. Command Interpreter Mode

10. Time and Date Setting

11. Remote Management

Enter Menu Selection Number:

Figure 26-5 Menu 24 System Maintenance

Then enter 10 to go to

Menu 24.10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting

to update the time and date settings of your Prestige as shown in the following screen.

Menu 24.10 - System Maintenance - Time and Date Setting

Use Time Server when Bootup= None

Time Server Address= N/A

Current Time: 00 : 00 : 00

New Time (hh:mm:ss): 11 : 23 : 16

Current Date: 2000 - 01 - 01

New Date (yyyy-mm-dd): 2001 - 03 - 01

Time Zone= GMT

Daylight Saving= No

Start Date (mm-dd): 01 – 00

End Date (mm_dd): 01 – 00

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 26-6 Menu 24.10 System Maintenance: Time and Date Setting

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 26-2 Menu 24.10 System Maintenance: Time and Date Setting

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Use Time Server when Bootup

Enter the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the

Prestige. Not all time servers support all protocols, so you may have to check with your ISP/network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works.

The main differences between them are the format.

Daytime (RFC 867)

format is day/month/year/time zone of the server.

Time (RFC-868)

format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0.

NTP (RFC-1305)

is similar to

Time (RFC-868)

.

None

. The default, enter the time manually.

Time Server

Address

Enter the IP address or domain name of your time server. Check with your

ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.

Current Time

New Time

Current Date

New Date

Time Zone

This field displays an updated time only when you reenter this menu.

Enter the new time in hour, minute and second format.

This field displays an updated date only when you re-enter this menu.

Enter the new date in year, month and day format.

Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Daylight Saving

Start Date

If you use daylight savings time, then choose

Yes

.

If using daylight savings time, enter the month and day that it starts on.

End Date If using daylight savings time, enter the month and day that it ends on

Once you have filled in this menu, press [ENTER] at the message “Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to

Cancel“ to save your configuration, or press [ESC] to cancel.

26.3.1 Resetting the Time

The Prestige resets the time in three instances: i. On leaving menu 24.10 after making changes. ii. iii.

When the Prestige starts up, if there is a timeserver configured in menu 24.10.

24-hour intervals after starting.

System Maintenance 26-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 27

Remote Management

This chapter covers remote management (SMT menu 24.11).

27.1 Remote Management Overview

Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which Prestige interface

(if any) from which computers.

27.2 Remote Management

To disable remote management of a service, select

Disable

in the corresponding

Server Access

field.

Enter 11 from menu 24 to display

Menu 24.11 — Remote Management Control

.

27.2.1 Remote Management Setup

You may manage your Prestige from a remote location via:

the Internet (

WAN only

), the

LAN only

,

All

(LAN and WAN) or

Disable

(neither).

WAN only (Internet) ALL (LAN and WAN)

LAN only Disable (Neither)

If you enable remote management of a service, but have applied a filter to block the service, then you will not be able to remotely manage the service.

Enter 11, from menu 24, to display

Menu 24.11 — Remote Management Control

(shown next).

Remote Management 27-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 24.11 - Remote Management Control

TELNET Server:

Server Port = 23 Server Access = LAN only

Secured Client IP = 0.0.0.0

FTP Server:

Server Port = 21 Server Access = LAN only

Secured Client IP = 0.0.0.0

Web Server:

Server Port = 80 Server Access = LAN only

Secured Client IP = 0.0.0.0

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 27-1 Menu 24.11 Remote Management Control

The following table describes the fields in this menu.

Table 27-1 Menu 24.11 Remote Management Control

Telnet Server

FTP Server

Web Server

Port

Each of these read-only labels denotes a service or protocol.

Access

This field shows the port number for the service or protocol. You may change the port number if needed, but you must use the same port number to access the Prestige.

Select the access interface (if any) by pressing the [SPACE BAR].

Choices are:

LAN only

,

WAN only

,

All

or

Disable

. The default is

LAN only

.

23

LAN only

Secured Client IP The default 0.0.0.0 allows any client to use this service or protocol to access the Prestige. Enter an IP address to restrict access to a client with a matching IP address.

0.0.0.0

Once you have filled in this menu, press [ENTER] at the message "Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to

Cancel" to save your configuration, or press [ESC] to cancel.

27.2.2 Remote Management Limitations

Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when:

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

1. A filter in menu 3.1 (LAN) or in menu 11.5 (WAN) is applied to block a Telnet, FTP or Web service.

2. You have disabled that service in menu 24.11.

3. The IP address in the

Secured Client IP

field (menu 24.11) does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the Prestige will disconnect the session immediately.

4. There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running. You may only have one remote management session running at one time.

27.3 Remote Management and NAT

When NAT is enabled:

Use the Prestige’s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN.

Use the Prestige’s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.

27.4 System Timeout

There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The Prestige automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when it is continuously updating the status in menu 24.1

or when sys stdio

has been changed on the command line.

Remote Management 27-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 28

IP Policy Routing

This chapter covers setting and applying policies used for IP routing.

28.1 IP Policy Routing Overview

Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the IAD takes the shortest path to forward a packet. IP Routing Policy (IPPR) provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis, prior to the normal routing.

28.2 Benefits of IP Policy Routing

Source-Based Routing – Network administrators can use policy-based routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections.

Quality of Service (QoS) – Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the precedence or TOS

(Type of Service) values in the IP header at the periphery of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic.

Cost Savings – IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on high-bandwidth, high-cost paths while using low-cost paths for batch traffic.

Load Sharing – Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths.

28.3 Routing Policy

Individual routing policies are used as part of the overall IPPR process. A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet meets the criteria. The action is taken only when all the criteria are met.

The criteria includes the source address and port, IP protocol (ICMP, UDP, TCP, etc.), destination address and port, TOS and precedence (fields in the IP header) and length. The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between interactive and bulk traffic. Interactive applications, for example, telnet, tend to have short packets, while bulk traffic, for example, file transfer, tends to have large packets.

The actions that can be taken include:

• routing the packet to a different gateway (and hence the outgoing interface).

• setting the TOS and precedence fields in the IP header.

IP Policy Routing 28-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of RAS in style and in implementation. The policies are divided into sets, where related policies are grouped together. A user defines the policies before applying them to an interface or a remote node, in the same fashion as the filters. There are 12 policy sets with six policies in each set.

28.4 IP Routing Policy Setup

Menu 25 shows all the policies defined.

Menu 25 - IP Routing Policy Setup

Policy Policy

Set # Name Set # Name

------ ----------------- ------ -----------------

1 test 7 _______________

2 _______________ 8 _______________

3 _______________ 9 _______________

4 _______________ 10 _______________

5 _______________ 11 _______________

6 _______________ 12 _______________

Enter Policy Set Number to Configure= 0

Edit Name= N/A

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 28-1 Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup

To setup a routing policy, perform the following procedures:

Step 1.

Type 25 in the main menu to open

Menu 25 – IP Routing Policy Setup.

Step 2.

Type the index of the policy set you want to configure to open

Menu 25.1 – IP Routing Policy

Setup

.

Menu 25.1 shows the summary of a policy set, including the criteria and the action of a single policy, and whether a policy is active or not. Each policy contains two lines. The former part is the criteria of the incoming packet and the latter is the action. Between these two parts, separator “|” means the action is taken on criteria matched and separator “=” means the action is taken on criteria not matched.

28-2 IP Policy Routing

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 25.1 - IP Routing Policy Setup

# A Criteria/Action

- - --------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 Y SA=1.1.1.1-1.1.1.1,DA=2.2.2.2-2.2.2.5

SP=20-25,DP=20-25,P=6,T=NM,PR=0 |GW=192.168.1.1,T=MT,PR=0

2 N __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3 N __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4 N __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5 N __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6 N __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Enter Policy Rule Number (1-6) to Configure:

Figure 28-2 Menu 25.1 IP Routing Policy Setup

TABLE 28-1 MENU 25.1 IP ROUTING POLICY SETUP

ABBREVIATION MEANING

Criterion

SA Source IP Address

SP Source Port

DA Destination IP Address

DP Destination Port

P IP layer 4 protocol number (TCP=6, UDP=17…)

T Type of service of incoming packet

PR Precedence of incoming packet

Action

GW Gateway IP address

T Outgoing Type of service

P Outgoing Precedence

Service

NM Normal

MD Minimum Delay

MT Maximum Throughput

MR Maximum Reliability

MC Minimum Cost

IP Policy Routing 28-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Type a number from 1 to 6 to display

Menu 25.1.1 – IP Routing Policy

(see the next figure).

This menu allows you to configure a policy rule.

Menu 25.1.1 - IP Routing Policy

Policy Set Name= test

Active= Yes

Criteria:

IP Protocol = 6

Type of Service= Normal

Precedence = 0

Source:

addr start= 1.1.1.1

port start= 20

Destination:

addr start= 2.2.2.2

port start= 20

Action= Matched

Gateway addr = 192.168.1.1

Len Comp= N/A end= 1.1.1.1 end= 20 end= 2.2.2.2 end= 20

Log= No

Type of Service= Max Thruput

Precedence = 0

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Press Space Bar to Toggle.

Packet length= 40

Figure 28-3 Menu 25.1.1 IP Routing Policy

The following table describes the fields in this menu.

Table 28-2 Menu 25.1.1 IP Routing Policy

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Policy Set Name This is the policy set name assigned in

Menu 25 – IP Routing Policy Setup

.

Active Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select

Yes

to activate or No to deactivate the policy. Inactive policies are displayed with a minus sign “-“ in SMT menu 25.

Criteria

IP Protocol IP layer 4 protocol, for example,

UDP

,

TCP

,

ICMP

, etc.

Type of Service

Precedence

Packet Length

Prioritize incoming network traffic by choosing from

Don’t Care

,

Normal

,

Min Delay

,

Max Thruput, Min Cost

or

Max Reliable

.

Precedence value of the incoming packet. Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select a value from

0

to

7

or

Don’t Care

.

Type the length of incoming packets (in bytes). The operators in the

Len Comp

(next field) apply to packets of this length.

28-4 IP Policy Routing

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 28-2 Menu 25.1.1 IP Routing Policy

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Len Comp Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to choose from

Greater

,

Less or Equal

or

Greater or Equal

.

Equal

,

Not Equal

,

Less

,

Source: addr start / end Source IP address range from start to end. port start / end Source port number range from start to end; applicable only for TCP/UDP.

Destination: addr start / end Destination IP address range from start to end. port start / end Destination port number range from start to end; applicable only for TCP/UDP.

Action Specifies whether action should be taken on criteria

Matched

or

Not Matched

.

Gateway addr

Type of Service

Defines the outgoing gateway address. The gateway must be on the same subnet as the Prestige if it is on the LAN, otherwise, the gateway must be the IP address of a remote node. The default gateway is specified as 0.0.0.0.

Set the new TOS value of the outgoing packet. Prioritize incoming network traffic by choosing

No Change

,

Normal

,

Min Delay

,

Max Thruput

,

Max Reliable

or

Min

Cost

.

Precedence

Log

Set the new outgoing packet precedence value. Values are

0

to

7

or

No Change

.

Press [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select

Yes

to make an entry in the system log when a policy is executed.

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

28.5 Applying an IP Policy

This section shows you where to apply the IP policies after you design them.

28.5.1 Ethernet IP Policies

From

Menu 3

Ethernet Setup

, type 2 to go to

Menu 3.2

TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup

.

You can choose up to four IP policy sets (from 12) by typing their numbers separated by commas, for example, 2, 4, 7, 9.

IP Policy Routing 28-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 3.2 - TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup

DHCP Setup:

DHCP= None

Client IP Pool Starting Address= N/A

Size of Client IP Pool= N/A

Primary DNS Server= N/A

Secondary DNS Server= N/A

Remote DHCP Server= N/A

TCP/IP Setup:

IP Address= 192.168.1.1

IP Subnet Mask= 255.255.255.0

RIP Direction= Both

Version= RIP-2B

Multicast= IGMP-v2

IP Policies= 2,4,7,9

Edit IP Alias= No

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Type IP

Policy sets here.

Figure 28-4 Menu 3.2 TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup

Go to menu 11.3 (shown next) and type the number(s) of the IP Routing Policy set(s) as appropriate. You can cascade up to four policy sets by typing their numbers separated by commas.

Menu 11.3 - Remote Node Network Layer Options

IP Options: Bridge Options:

IP Address Assignment= Static Ethernet Addr Timeout (min)= 0

Rem IP Addr: 0.0.0.0

Rem Subnet Mask= 0.0.0.0

My WAN Addr= 0.0.0.0

NAT= Full Feature

Address Mapping Set= 2

Metric= 2

Private= No

RIP Direction= Both

Version= RIP-2B

Multicast= IGMP-v2

IP Policies= 2,4,7,9

Type IP

Policy sets here.

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 28-5 Menu 11.3 Remote Node Network Layer Options

28.6 IP Policy Routing Example

If a network has both Internet and remote node connections, you can route Web packets to the Internet using one policy and route FTP packets to a remote network using another policy. See the next figure.

Route 1 represents the default IP route and route 2 represents the configured IP route.

28-6 IP Policy Routing

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Figure 28-6 Example of IP Policy Routing

To force Web packets coming from clients with IP addresses of 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64 to be routed to the Internet via the WAN port of the Prestige, follow the steps as shown next.

Step 1.

Create a routing policy set in menu 25.

Step 2.

Create a rule for this set in

Menu 25.1.1 — IP Routing Policy

as shown next.

IP Policy Routing 28-7

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 25.1.1 - IP Routing Policy

Policy Set Name= set1

Active= Yes

Criteria:

IP Protocol = 6

Type of Service= Don't Care

Precedence = Don't Care

Source:

Packet length= 10

Len Comp= N/A

addr start= 192.168.1.33 end= 192.168.1.64

port start= 0 end= N/A

Destination:

addr start= 0.0.0.0 end= N/A

port start= 80 end= 80

Action= Matched

Gateway addr = 192.168.1.1 Log= No

Type of Service= No Change

Precedence = No Change

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Press Space Bar to Toggle.

Figure 28-7 IP Routing Policy Example

Step 3.

Check

Menu 25.1 — IP Routing Policy Setup

to see if the rule is added correctly.

Step 4.

Create another policy set in menu 25.

Step 5.

Create a rule in menu 25.1 for this set to route packets from any host (IP=0.0.0.0 means any host) with protocol TCP and port FTP access through another gateway (192.168.1.100).

28-8 IP Policy Routing

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 25.1.1 - IP Routing Policy

Policy Set Name= set2

Active= Yes

Criteria:

IP Protocol = 6

Type of Service= Don't Care Packet length= 10

Precedence = Don't Care

Source:

Len Comp= N/A

addr start= 0.0.0.0 end= N/A

port start= 0 end= N/A

Destination:

addr start= 0.0.0.0 end= N/A

port start= 20 end= 21

Action= Matched

Gateway addr =192.168.1.100

Log= No

Type of Service= No Change

Precedence = No Change

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Press Space Bar to Toggle.

Figure 28-8 IP Routing Policy Example

Step 6.

Check

Menu 25.1 — IP Routing Policy Setup

to see if the rule is added correctly.

Step 7.

Apply both policy sets in menu 3.2 as shown next.

Menu 3.2 - TCP/IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup

DHCP Setup

DHCP= Server

Client IP Pool Starting Address= 192.168.1.33

Size of Client IP Pool= 64

Primary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0

Secondary DNS Server= 0.0.0.0

Remote DHCP Server= N/A

TCP/IP Setup:

IP Address= 192.168.1.1

IP Subnet Mask= 255.255.255.0

RIP Direction= Both

Version= RIP-1

Multicast= None

IP Policies= 1,2

Edit IP Alias= No

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Press Space Bar to Toggle.

Figure 28-9 Applying IP Policies Example

IP Policy Routing 28-9

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chapter 29

Call Scheduling

Call scheduling (applicable for PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation only) allows you to dictate when a remote node should be called and for how long.

29.1 Introduction

The call scheduling feature allows the Prestige to manage a remote node and dictate when a remote node should be called and for how long. This feature is similar to the scheduler in a videocassette recorder (you can specify a time period for the VCR to record). You can apply up to 4 schedule sets in

Menu 11.1 —

Remote Node Profile

. From the main menu, enter 26 to access

Menu 26 — Schedule Setup

as shown next.

Schedule

Set #

------

1

2

3

4

5

6

Name

-----------------

______________

______________

______________

______________

______________

______________

Menu 26 - Schedule Setup

Schedule

Set #

------

7

8

9

10

11

12

Name

------------------

______________

______________

______________

______________

______________

______________

Enter Schedule Set Number to Configure=

Edit Name=

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Figure 29-1 Menu 26 Schedule Setup

Lower numbered sets take precedence over higher numbered sets thereby avoiding scheduling conflicts. For example, if sets 1, 2 ,3 and 4 in are applied in the remote node then set 1 will take precedence over set 2, 3 and 4 as the Prestige, by default, applies the lowest numbered set first. Set 2 will take precedence over set 3 and 4, and so on.

You can design up to 12 schedule sets but you can only apply up to four schedule sets for a remote node.

Call Scheduling 29-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

To delete a schedule set, enter the set number and press

[SPACE BAR]

and then

[ENTER]

(or delete) in the

Edit Name

field.

To setup a schedule set, select the schedule set you want to setup from menu 26 (1-12) and press [ENTER] to see

Menu 26.1 — Schedule Set Setup

as shown next.

Menu 26.1 - Schedule Set Setup

Active= Yes

Start Date(yyyy/mm/dd) = 2000 – 01 - 01

How Often= Once

Once:

Date(yyyy/mm/dd)= 2000 – 01 - 01

Weekdays:

Sunday= N/A

Monday= N/A

Tuesday= N/A

Wednesday= N/A

Thursday= N/A

Friday= N/A

Saturday= N/A

Start Time (hh:mm)= 00 : 00

Duration (hh:mm)= 00 : 00

Action= Forced On

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Press Space Bar to Toggle

Figure 29-2 Menu 26.1 Schedule Set Setup

If a connection has been already established, your Prestige will not drop it. Once the connection is dropped manually or it times out, then that remote node can't be triggered up until the end of the

Duration

.

Table 29-1 Menu 26.1 Schedule Set Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE

Active

Start Date

How Often

Press [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes

or

No

[ENTER] to activate the schedule set.

. Choose

Yes

and press

Enter the start date when you wish the set to take effect in year -monthdate format. Valid dates are from the present to 2036-February-5.

Should this schedule set recur weekly or be used just once only? Press the [SPACE BAR] and then [ENTER] to select

Once

or

Weekly

. Both these options are mutually exclusive. If

Once

is selected, then all weekday settings are

N/A

. When

Once

is selected, the schedule rule deletes automatically after the scheduled time elapses.

Yes

2000-01-01

Once

29-2 Call Scheduling

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Table 29-1 Menu 26.1 Schedule Set Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE

Once:

Date

If you selected

Once

in the

How Often

field above, then enter the date the set should activate here in year-month-date format.

2000-01-01

Weekday:

Day

If you selected

Weekly

in the

How Often

field above, then select the day(s) when the set should activate (and recur) by going to that day(s) and pressing [SPACE BAR] to select

Yes

, then press [ENTER].

Yes

No

N/A

Start Time

Duration

Enter the start time when you wish the schedule set to take effect in hour-minute format.

The duration determines how long the Prestige is to apply the action configured in the

Action

field. Enter the maximum length of time in hour-minute format.

09:00

08:00

Action

Forced On

means that the connection is maintained whether or not there is a demand call on the line and will persist for the time period specified in the

Duration

field.

Forced Down

means that the connection is blocked whether or not there is a demand call on the line.

Enable Dial-On-Demand

means that this schedule permits a demand call on the line.

Disable Dial-On-Demand

means that this schedule prevents a demand call on the line.

Forced On

When you have completed this menu, press [ENTER] at the prompt “Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel” to save your configuration or press [ESC] to cancel and go back to the previous screen.

Once your schedule sets are configured, you must then apply them to the desired remote node(s). Enter 11 from the

Main Menu

and then enter the target remote node index. Using [SPACE BAR] , select

PPPoE

or

PPPoA

in the

Encapsulation

field and then press [ENTER] to make the schedule sets field available as shown next.

Call Scheduling 29-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Menu 11.1 - Remote Node Profile

Rem Node Name= ChangeMe Route= IP

Active= Yes Bridge= No

Encapsulation= PPPoE Edit IP/Bridge= No

Multiplexing=VC-based

Service Name=

Incoming

Rem Login=

Rem Password= ********

Outgoing= Nailed-Up Connection= No

My Login=?

My Password= ********

Edit ATM Options= No

Telco Option:

Allocated Budget(min)= 0

Period(hr)= 0

Schedules= 1,2,3,4

Session Options:

Authen= CHAP/PAP Edit Filter Sets= No

Idle Timeout(sec)= 100

Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel:

Press Space Bar to Toggle.

Apply your schedule sets here.

Figure 29-3 Applying Schedule Set(s) to a Remote Node (PPPoE)

You can apply up to four schedule sets, separated by commas, for one remote node. Change the schedule set numbers to your preference(s).

29-4 Call Scheduling

Part VIII:

Appendices and Index

This part contains additional background information and an index or key terms.

VIII

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Appendix A

Troubleshooting

This chapter covers potential problems and the corresponding remedies.

Problems Starting Up the Prestige

Chart A-1 Troubleshooting the Start-Up of Your Prestige

None of the

LEDs turn on when I turn on the Prestige.

Make sure that the Prestige’s power adaptor is connected to the Prestige and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Check that the Prestige and the power source are both turned on.

Turn the Prestige off and on.

If the error persists, you may have a hardware problem. In this case, you should contact your vendor.

Problems with the LAN LED

Chart A-2 Troubleshooting the LAN LED

The LAN LEDs do not turn on.

Check your Ethernet cable connections and type (refer to the

Read Me First

for details).

Check for faulty Ethernet cables.

Make sure your computer’s Ethernet Card is working properly.

Troubleshooting A-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Problems with the DSL LED

Chart A-3 Troubleshooting the DSL LED

The xDSL LED is off. Check the telephone wire and connections between the Prestige DSL port and the wall jack.

Make sure that the telephone company has checked your phone line and set it up for

DSL service.

Reset your ADSL line to reinitialize your link to the DSLAM. For details, refer to the

Maintenance

chapter (web configurator) or the System Information and Diagnosis chapter (SMT).

Problems with the LAN Interface

Chart A-4 Troubleshooting the LAN Interface

I cannot access the

Prestige from the

LAN.

I cannot ping any computer on the

LAN.

If the 10M/100M LEDs on the front panel are both off, refer to

Chart A-2

Troubleshooting the LAN LED

.

Make sure that the IP address and the subnet mask of the Prestige and your computer(s) are on the same subnet.

If the 10M/100M LEDs on the front panel are both off, refer to

Chart A-2

Troubleshooting the LAN LED

.

Make sure that the IP address and the subnet mask of the Prestige and the computers are on the same subnet.

Problems with the WAN Interface

Chart A-5 Troubleshooting the WAN Interface

I cannot get a WAN

IP address from the

ISP.

The ISP provides the WAN IP address after authenticating you. Authentication may be through the user name and password, the MAC address or the host name.

The username and password apply to PPPoE and PPoA encapsulation only. Make sure that you have entered the correct

Service Type

,

User Name

and

Password

(be sure to use the correct casing). Refer to the

WAN Setup

chapter (web configurator) or the

Internet Access

chapter (SMT).

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Problems with Internet Access

Chart A-6 Troubleshooting Internet Access

I cannot access the Internet.

Internet connection disconnects.

Make sure the Prestige is turned on and connected to the network.

If the DSL LED is off, refer to

Chart A-3 Troubleshooting the DSL LED

.

Verify your WAN settings. Refer to the

WAN Setup

chapter (web configurator) or the

Internet Access

chapter (SMT).

Make sure you entered the correct user name and password.

If you use PPPoE pass through, make sure that bridge is turned on. See the

Menu 1

General Setup

chapter for details.

For wireless stations, check that both the Prestige and wireless station(s) are using the same ESSID, channel and WEP keys (if WEP encryption is activated).

Check the schedule rules. Refer to the

Call Scheduling

chapter (SMT).

If you use PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation, check the idle time-out setting. Refer to the

WAN

chapter (web configurator) or the

Remote Node Configuration

chapter (SMT).

Contact your ISP.

Problems with the Password

Chart A-7 Troubleshooting the Password

I cannot access the

Prestige.

The username is “admin”. The default password is “1234”. The

Password

and

Username

fields are case-sensitive. Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing.

If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it, you will need to upload the default configuration file (Refer to the

Resetting the Prestige

section in the

Introducing the Web Configurator

chapter). This restores all of the factory defaults including the password.

Troubleshooting A-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Problems with the Web Configurator

Chart A-8 Troubleshooting the Web Configurator

I cannot access the web configurator.

Refer to

Chart A-7 Troubleshooting the Password

.

Make sure that there is not an SMT console session running.

Check that you have enabled web service access. If you have configured a secured client IP address, your computer’s IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on remote management for details.

For WAN access, you must configure remote management to allow server access from the Wan (or all). Refer to the chapters on remote management for details.

Your computer’s and the Prestige’s IP addresses must be on the same subnet for

LAN access.

If you changed the Prestige’s LAN IP address, then enter the new one as the URL.

Remove any filters in SMT menu 3.1 (LAN) or menu 11.5 (WAN) that block web service.

See also the

Problems with Remote Management

section.

Problems with Remote Management

Chart A-9 Troubleshooting Remote Management

I cannot remotely manage the

Prestige from the

LAN or WAN.

Refer to the

Remote Management Limitations

section in the

Firmware and

Configuration File Management

chapter (SMT) for scenarios when remote management may not be possible.

Use the Prestige’s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN.

Use the Prestige’s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.

Refer to

Chart A-4 Troubleshooting the LAN Interface

for instructions on checking your LAN connection.

Refer to the

Problems with the WAN Interface

section for instructions on checking your WAN connection.

See also the

Problems with the Web Configurator

section.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Appendix B

IP Subnetting

IP Addressing

Routers “route” based on the network number. The router that delivers the data packet to the correct destination host uses the host ID.

IP Classes

An IP address is made up of four octets (eight bits), written in dotted decimal notation, for example,

192.168.1.1. IP addresses are categorized into different classes. The class of an address depends on the value of its first octet.

Class “A” addresses have a 0 in the left most bit. In a class “A” address the first octet is the network number and the remaining three octets make up the host ID.

Class “B” addresses have a 1 in the left most bit and a 0 in the next left most bit. In a class “B” address the first two octets make up the network number and the two remaining octets make up the host ID.

Class “C” addresses begin (starting from the left) with 1 1 0. In a class “C” address the first three octets make up the network number and the last octet is the host ID.

Class “D” addresses begin with 1 1 1 0. Class “D” addresses are used for multicasting. (There is also a class “E” address. It is reserved for future use.)

IP ADDRESS:

Class A

Class B

Class C

0

10

110

Chart B-1 Classes of IP Addresses

OCTET 1

Network number

Network number

Network number

OCTET 2

Host ID

Network number

Network number

OCTET 3

Host ID

Host ID

Network number

OCTET 4

Host ID

Host ID

Host ID

Host IDs of all zeros or all ones are not allowed.

Therefore:

A class “C” network (8 host bits) can have 2

8

–2 or 254 hosts.

A class “B” address (16 host bits) can have 2

16

–2 or 65534 hosts.

IP Subnetting B-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

A class “A” address (24 host bits) can have 2

24

–2 hosts (approximately 16 million hosts).

Since the first octet of a class “A” IP address must contain a “0”, the first octet of a class “A” address can have a value of 0 to 127.

Similarly the first octet of a class “B” must begin with “10”, therefore the first octet of a class “B” address has a valid range of 128 to 191. The first octet of a class “C” address begins with “110”, and therefore has a range of 192 to 223.

Chart B-2 Allowed IP Address Range By Class

CLASS

Class A

Class B

Class C

ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET

(BINARY)

0

0000000 to

0

1111111

10

000000 to

10

111111

110

00000 to

110

11111

ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET

(DECIMAL)

0 to 127

128 to 191

192 to 223

Class D

Subnet Masks

1110

0000 to

1110

1111 224 to 239

A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). A subnet mask has 32 bits; each bit of the mask corresponds to a bit of the IP address. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID.

Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just as IP addresses are. The “natural” masks for class

A, B and C IP addresses are as follows.

Chart B-3 “Natural” Masks

A 255.0.0.0

B 255.255.0.0

C 255.255.255.0

Subnetting

With subnetting, the class arrangement of an IP address is ignored. For example, a class C address no longer has to have 24 bits of network number and 8 bits of host ID. With subnetting, some of the host ID bits are converted into network number bits. By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway of ones beginning from the left most bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits.

Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/” followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address.

For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128.

The following table shows all possible subnet masks for a class “C” address using both notations.

Chart B-4 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation

SUBNET MASK IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK “1” BITS

255.255.255.0 /24

255.255.255.128 /25

255.255.255.192 /26

255.255.255.224 /27

255.255.255.240 /28

255.255.255.248 /29

LAST OCTET BIT VALUE

255.255.255.252 /30

The first mask shown is the class “C” natural mask. Normally if no mask is specified it is understood that the natural mask is being used.

Example: Two Subnets

As an example, you have a class “C” address 192.168.1.0 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.

NETWORK NUMBER HOST ID

IP Address

IP Address (Binary)

Subnet Mask

192.168.1. 0

11000000.10101000.00000001. 00000000

255.255.255. 0

Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 00000000

The first three octets of the address make up the network number (class “C”). You want to have two separate networks.

IP Subnetting B-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate subnets by converting one of the host ID bits of the IP address to a network number bit. The “borrowed” host ID bit can be either “0” or “1” thus giving two subnets; 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 and 192.168.1.128 with mask 255.255.255.128.

In the following charts, shaded/bolded last octet bit values indicate host ID bits

“borrowed” to form network ID bits. The number of “borrowed” host ID bits determines the number of subnets you can have. The remaining number of host ID bits (after “borrowing”) determines the number of hosts you can have on each subnet.

Chart B-5 Subnet 1

IP Address

IP Address (Binary)

Subnet Mask

Subnet Mask (Binary)

Subnet Address: 192.168.1.0

Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.127

NETWORK NUMBER

192.168.1.

11000000.10101000.00000001.

255.255.255.

11111111.11111111.11111111.

LAST OCTET BIT VALUE

0

0

1

0000000

128

0000000

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126

Chart B-6 Subnet 2

IP Address

NETWORK NUMBER

192.168.1.

LAST OCTET BIT VALUE

128

IP Address (Binary)

Subnet Mask

11000000.10101000.00000001.

255.255.255.

1

0000000

128

Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111.

1

0000000

Subnet Address: 192.168.1.128 Lowest

Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.255 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254

The remaining 7 bits determine the number of hosts each subnet can have. Host IDs of all zeros represent the subnet itself and host IDs of all ones are the broadcast address for that subnet, so the actual number of hosts available on each subnet in the example above is 2

7

– 2 or 126 hosts for each subnet.

192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is the subnet itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is the directed broadcast address for the first subnet. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway actual host for the first subnet is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly the host ID range for the second subnet is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.

Example: Four Subnets

The above example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a class “C” address space into two subnets. Similarly to divide a class “C” address into four subnets, you need to “borrow” two host ID bits to give four possible combinations of 00, 01, 10 and 11. The subnet mask is 26 bits

(11111111.11111111.11111111.

11

000000) or 255.255.255.192. Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving

2

6

-2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (all 0’s is the subnet itself, all 1’s is the broadcast address on the subnet).

Chart B-7 Subnet 1

IP Address

IP Address (Binary)

Subnet Mask (Binary)

Subnet Address: 192.168.1.0

Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.63

NETWORK NUMBER

192.168.1.

11000000.10101000.00000001.

11111111.11111111.11111111.

0

LAST OCTET BIT VALUE

00

11

000000

000000

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62

Chart B-8 Subnet 2

IP Address

IP Address (Binary)

Subnet Mask (Binary)

Subnet Address: 192.168.1.64

Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.127

NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE

192.168.1.

11000000.10101000.00000001.

64

01

000000

11111111.11111111.11111111.

11

000000

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126

Chart B-9 Subnet 3

IP Address

IP Address (Binary)

NETWORK NUMBER

192.168.1.

11000000.10101000.00000001.

LAST OCTET BIT VALUE

128

10

000000

Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111.

11

000000

Subnet Address: 192.168.1.128 Lowest

Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.191 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190

IP Subnetting B-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chart B-10 Subnet 4

IP Address

NETWORK NUMBER

192.168.1.

LAST OCTET BIT VALUE

192

IP Address (Binary)

Subnet Mask (Binary)

11000000.10101000.00000001.

11111111.11111111.11111111.

11

11

000000

000000

Subnet Address: 192.168.1.192 Lowest

Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.255 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254

Example Eight Subnets

Similarly use a 27-bit mask to create 8 subnets (001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110).

The following table shows class C IP address last octet values for each subnet.

Chart B-11 Eight Subnets

SUBNET SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS LAST ADDRESS BROADCAST ADDRESS

1 0 1 30

2 32 33 62

3 64 65 94

31

63

95

4 96 97 126

5 128 129 158

6 160 161 190

7 192 193 222

127

159

191

223

255 8 224 223 254

The following table is a summary for class “C” subnet planning.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chart B-12 Class C Subnet Planning

NO. “BORROWED” HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET

1 255.255.255.128 126

2 255.255.255.192 62

3 255.255.255.224 30

4 255.255.255.240 14

5 255.255.255.248 6

6 255.255.255.252 2

7 255.255.255.254 1

Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks.

For class “A” and class “B” addresses the subnet mask also determines which bits are part of the network number and which are part of the host ID.

A class “B” address has two host ID octets available for subnetting and a class “A” address has three host ID octets (see

Chart B-1

) available for subnetting.

The following table is a summary for class “B” subnet planning.

Chart B-13 Class B Subnet Planning

NO. “BORROWED” HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET

1 255.255.128.0 32766

2 255.255.192.0 16382

3 255.255.224.0 8190

4 255.255.240.0 4094

5 255.255.248.0 2046

6 255.255.252.0 1022

7 255.255.254.0 510

8 255.255.255.0 254

9 255.255.255.128

(/25)

512 126

IP Subnetting B-7

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chart B-13 Class B Subnet Planning

NO. “BORROWED” HOST BITS SUBNET MASK

(/25)

NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET

(/26)

(/27)

12 255.255.255.240

(/28)

4096 14

13 255.255.255.248

(/29)

8192 6

(/30)

(/31)

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Appendix C

PPPoE

PPPoE in Action

An ADSL modem bridges a PPP session over Ethernet (PPP over Ethernet, RFC 2516) from your PC to an

ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) that connects to a xDSL Access Concentrator where the PPP session terminates (see the next figure). One PVC can support any number of PPP sessions from your LAN. PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP.

Benefits of PPPoE

PPPoE offers the following benefits:

1. It provides you with a familiar dial-up networking (DUN) user interface.

2. It lessens the burden on the carriers of provisioning virtual circuits all the way to the ISP on multiple switches for thousands of users. For GSTN (PSTN and ISDN), the switching fabric is already in place.

3. It allows the ISP to use the existing dial-up model to authenticate and (optionally) to provide differentiated services.

Traditional Dial-up Scenario

The following diagram depicts a typical hardware configuration where the PCs use traditional dial-up networking.

Diagram C-1 Single-PC per Router Hardware Configuration

PPPoE C-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

How PPPoE Works

The PPPoE driver makes the Ethernet appear as a serial link to the PC and the PC runs PPP over it, while the modem bridges the Ethernet frames to the Access Concentrator (AC). Between the AC and an ISP, the AC is acting as a L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol) LAC (L2TP Access Concentrator) and tunnels the PPP frames to the ISP. The L2TP tunnel is capable of carrying multiple PPP sessions.

With PPPoE, the VC (Virtual Circuit) is equivalent to the dial-up connection and is between the modem and the AC, as opposed to all the way to the ISP. However, the PPP negotiation is between the PC and the ISP.

Prestige as a PPPoE Client

When using the Prestige as a PPPoE client, the PCs on the LAN see only Ethernet and are not aware of

PPPoE. This alleviates the administrator from having to manage the PPPoE clients on the individual PCs.

Diagram C-2 Prestige as a PPPoE Client

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Appendix D

Virtual Circuit Topology

ATM is a connection-oriented technology, meaning that it sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The terminology for virtual circuits is as follows:

Virtual Channel

Virtual Path

Virtual Circuit

Logical connections between ATM switches

A bundle of virtual channels

A series of virtual paths between circuit end points

Diagram D-1 Virtual Circuit Topology

Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points. In an ATM cell header, a VPI (Virtual

Path Identifier) identifies a link formed by a virtual path; a VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) identifies a channel within a virtual path.

The VPI and VCI identify a virtual path, that is, termination points between ATM switches. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit.

Your service provider should supply you with VPI/VCI numbers.

Virtual Circuit Topology D-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Appendix E

Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address

All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed.

Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of

UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your computer.

Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package.

TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems.

After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to

"communicate" with your network.

If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Prestige's LAN port.

Windows 95/98/Me

Click

Start

,

Settings

,

Control Panel

and double-click the

Network

icon to open the

Network

window.

Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address E-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Installing Components

The

Network

window

Configuration

tab displays a list of installed components. You need a network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks.

If you need the adapter: a. In the

Network

window, click

Add

. b. c.

Select

Adapter

and then click

Add

.

Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click

OK

.

If you need TCP/IP: a. In the

Network

window, click

Add

.

Select

Protocol

and then click

Add

. b. c. d.

Select

Microsoft

from the list of

manufacturers

.

Select

TCP/IP

from the list of network protocols and then click

OK

.

If you need Client for Microsoft Networks: a. Click

Add

. b. c. d. e.

Select

Client

and then click

Add

.

Select

Microsoft

from the list of manufacturers.

Select

Client for Microsoft Networks

from the list of network clients and then click

OK

.

Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect.

Configuring

1. In the

Network

window

Configuration

tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click

Properties

.

E-2 Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address

2. Click the

IP Address

tab.

-If your IP address is dynamic, select

Obtain an

IP address automatically

.

-If you have a static IP address, select

Specify an IP address

and type your information into the

IP Address

and

Subnet Mask

fields.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

3. Click the

DNS

Configuration tab.

-If you do not know your DNS information, select

Disable DNS

.

-If you know your DNS information, select

Enable DNS

and type the information in the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in).

Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address E-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

4. Click the

Gateway

tab.

-If you do not know your gateway’s IP address, remove previously installed gateways.

-If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the

New gateway field

and click

Add

.

1.

2.

3.

5. Click

OK

to save and close the

TCP/IP Properties

window.

6. Click

OK

to close the

Network

window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted.

7. Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer when prompted.

Verifying Settings

Click

Start

and then

Run

.

In the

Run

window, type "winipcfg" and then click

OK

to open the

IP Configuration

window.

Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default gateway.

E-4 Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address

Windows 2000/NT/XP

1. For Windows XP, click

start

,

Control Panel

. In

Windows 2000/NT, click

Start

,

Settings

,

Control

Panel

.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

2. For Windows XP, click

Network

Connections

. For Windows 2000/NT, click

Network and Dial-up Connections

.

3. Right-click

Local Area Connection

and then click

Properties

.

Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address E-5

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

4. Select

Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

(under the

General

tab in Win XP) and click

Properties

.

5. The

Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties

window opens (the

General tab

in Windows XP).

-If you have a dynamic IP address click

Obtain an IP address automatically

.

-If you have a static IP address click

Use the following IP Address

and fill in the

IP address

,

Subnet mask

, and

Default gateway

fields.

Click

Advanced

.

E-6 Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

6. -If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the

IP Settin

gs tab and click

OK

.

Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:

-In the

IP Settings

tab, in IP addresses, click

Add

.

-In

TCP/IP Address

, type an IP address in

IP address

and a subnet mask in

Subnet mask

, and then click

Add

.

-Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.

-Configure additional default gateways in the

IP

Settings

tab by clicking

Add

in

Default gateways

.

-In

TCP/IP Gateway Address

, type the IP address of the default gateway in

Gateway

. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the

Automatic metric

check box and type a metric in

Metric

.

-Click

Add

.

-Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.

-Click

OK

when finished.

Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address E-7

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

7. In the

Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties

window (the

General tab

in Windows XP):

-Click

Obtain DNS server address automatically

if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es).

-If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click

Use the following DNS server addresses

, and type them in the

Preferred DNS server

and

Alternate DNS server

fields.

If you have previously configured DNS servers, click

Advanced

and then the

DNS

tab to order them.

8. Click

OK

to close the

Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties

window.

9. Click

OK

to close the

Local Area Connection Properties

window.

10. Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted).

Verifying Settings

1. Click

Start

,

All Programs

,

Accessories

and then

Command Prompt

.

2. In the

Command Prompt

window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open

Network Connections

, right-click a network connection, click

Status

and then click the

Support

tab.

E-8 Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address

Macintosh OS 8/9

1. Click the

Apple

menu,

Control Panel

and double-click

TCP/IP

to open the

TCP/IP Control Panel

.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

2. Select

Ethernet built-in

from the

Connect via

list.

Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address E-9

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

3. For dynamically assigned settings, select

Using DHCP Server

from the

Configure:

list.

4. For statically assigned settings, do the following:

-From the

Configure

box, select

Manually

.

-Type your IP address in the

IP Address

box.

-Type your subnet mask in the

Subnet mask

box.

-Type the IP address of your Prestige in the

Router address

box.

5. Close the

TCP/IP Control Panel

.

6. Click

Save

if prompted, to save changes to your configuration.

7. Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted).

Verifying Settings

Check your TCP/IP properties in the

TCP/IP Control Panel

window.

Macintosh OS X

1.

Click the

Apple

menu, and click

System Preferences

to open the

System Preferences

window.

E-10 Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address

2.

Click

Network

in the icon bar.

- Select

Automatic

from the

Location

list.

- Select

Built-in Ethernet

from the

Show

list.

- Click the

TCP/IP

tab.

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

3.

For dynamically assigned settings, select

Using DHCP

from the

Configure

list.

4. For statically assigned settings, do the following:

-From the

Configure

box, select

Manually

.

-Type your IP address in the

IP Address

-Type your subnet mask in the

box.

Subnet mask

box.

-Type the IP address of your Prestige in the

Router address

box.

5. Click

Apply Now

and close the window.

6. Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted).

Verifying Settings

Check your TCP/IP properties in the

Network

window.

Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address E-11

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Appendix F

Splitters and Microfilters

This appendix tells you how to install a POTS splitter or a telephone microfilter.

Connecting a POTS Splitter

When you use the Full Rate (G.dmt) ADSL standard, you can use a POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service) splitter to separate the telephone and ADSL signals. This allows simultaneous Internet access and telephone service on the same line. A splitter also eliminates the destructive interference conditions caused by telephone sets.

Install the POTS splitter at the point where the telephone line enters your residence, as shown in the following figure.

Diagram F-1 Connecting a POTS Splitter

Step 1.

Connect the side labeled “Phone” to your telephone.

Step 2.

Connect the side labeled “Modem” to your Prestige.

Step 3.

Connect the side labeled “Line” to the telephone wall jack.

Telephone Microfilters

Telephone voice transmissions take place in the lower frequency range, 0 - 4KHz, while ADSL transmissions take place in the higher bandwidth range, above 4KHz. A microfilter acts as a low-pass filter, for your telephone, to ensure that ADSL transmissions do not interfere with your telephone voice transmissions. The use of a telephone microfilter is optional.

Step 1.

Connect a phone cable from the wall jack to the single jack end of the Y- Connector.

Splitters and Microfilters F-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Step 2.

Connect a cable from the double jack end of the Y-Connector to the “wall side” of the microfilter.

Step 3.

Connect another cable from the double jack end of the Y-Connector to the Prestige.

Step 4.

Connect the “phone side” of the microfilter to your telephone as shown in the following figure.

Diagram F-2 Connecting a Microfilter

Prestige With ISDN

This section relates to people who use their Prestige with ADSL over ISDN (digital telephone service) only.

The following is an example installation for the Prestige with ISDN.

F-2

Diagram F-3 Prestige with ISDN

Splitters and Microfilters

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Appendix G

Log Descriptions

This appendix provides descriptions of example log messages

1

.

Chart G-1 System Maintenance Logs

LOG MESSAGE

Time calibration is successful

Time calibration failed

DHCP client gets %s

DHCP client IP expired

DHCP server assigns

%s

SMT Login

Successfully

SMT Login Fail

WEB Login

Successfully

WEB Login Fail

TELNET Login

Successfully

TELNET Login Fail

FTP Login

Successfully

FTP Login Fail

DESCRIPTION

The router has adjusted its time based on information from the time server.

The router failed to get information from the time server.

A DHCP client got a new IP address from the DHCP server.

A DHCP client's IP address has expired.

The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client.

Someone has logged on to the router's SMT interface.

Someone has failed to log on to the router's SMT interface.

Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface.

Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator interface.

Someone has logged on to the router via telnet.

Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet.

Someone has logged on to the router via ftp.

Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp.

1

At the time of writing, the Prestige did not support the generation of all of the logs shown here.

Log Descriptions G-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Access logs may include the following information:

(Protocol) is the protocol of the packet (for example TCP or UDP) that triggered the log.

(Direction) is the direction in which the packet was traveling (for example LAN to WAN or WAN to LAN)

Chart G-2 Access Logs

LOG MESSAGE

ICMP Source Quench

ICMP Time Exceed

ICMP Destination

Unreachable

DESCRIPTION

The Prestige sent or received an ICMP source quench packet to tell a host to slow down data transmission.

The Prestige sent or received an ICMP Time Exceed packet because a packet with zero Time To Live (TTL) was dropped.

The Prestige sent or received an ICMP Destination Unreachable packet when a packet was dropped because the target port was not open.

The router blocked a packet that did not have a corresponding NAT table entry.

Packet without a NAT table entry blocked

(Protocol)

Out of order TCP handshake packet blocked (Protocol)

Unsupported/out-oforder ICMP (Protocol)

The router blocked a TCP handshake packet that came out of the proper order

The Prestige generates this log after it drops an ICMP packet due to one of the following two reasons:

1. The Prestige does not support the ICMP packet's protocol.

2. The ICMP packet is an echo reply for which there was no corresponding echo request.

Remote access denied The router blocked a remote access attempt.

TYPE CODE

0 Echo Reply

Chart G-3 ICMP Notes

DESCRIPTION

3 Destination Unreachable

TYPE CODE

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chart G-3 ICMP Notes

DESCRIPTION

4

Fragment (DF)

4 Source Quench

0 needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network.

5 Redirect

8 Echo

11 Time Exceeded

12 Parameter Problem

13 Timestamp

14 Timestamp Reply

Log Descriptions G-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Chart G-3 ICMP Notes

TYPE CODE

15 Information Request

DESCRIPTION

16 Information Reply

A

Address Assignment ........................................ 5-2

ADSL, what is it?............................................ xxii

Alternative Subnet Mask Notation.................. B-3

AT command ................................................. 25-1

Authentication.......................................18-4, 18-5 auto-negotiation ............................................... 1-2

B

Backup ........................................................... 25-2

Bridging ......................................................... 16-2

Ether Address ............................................ 20-4

Ethernet...................................................... 20-1

Ethernet Addr Timeout .............................. 20-3

Remote Node ............................................. 20-1

Static Route Setup...................................... 20-3

Budget Management .............................26-2, 26-3

C

Call Filtering .................................................. 22-1

Call Filters

Built-In....................................................... 22-1

User-Defined ............................................. 22-1

Call Scheduling.............................................. 29-1

Maximum Number of Schedule Sets ......... 29-1

PPPoE ........................................................ 29-3

Precedence ................................................. 29-1

Precedence Example.................

See

precedence

CDR ............................................................... 24-7

CDR (Call Detail Record).............................. 24-6

CHAP............................................................. 18-4

Classes of IP Addresses .................................. B-1

Collision......................................................... 24-3

Command Interpreter Mode........................... 26-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Appendix H

Index

Community .................................................... 23-2

Computer Name............................................. 14-1

Conditions that prevent TFTP and FTP from working over WAN ................................... 25-4

Configuration........................................ 3-11, 12-6

Copyright .............................................................ii

Cost Of Transmission ........................... 18-7, 19-3

Country Code................................................. 24-4

CPU Load ...................................................... 24-3

Customer Support ................................................v

D

Data Filtering................................................. 22-1

Device Filter rules........................................ 22-14

DHCP .................... 1-3, 3-11, 5-2, 8-1, 12-6, 24-4

Diagnostic Tools............................................ 24-1

Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer.... 1-6

DNS ............................................................... 16-3

Domain Name........................................... 5-2, 7-5

Domain Name System ..................................... 5-1

DSL (Digital Subscriber Line).........................xxii

DSL, What Is It? ..............................................xxii

DSLAM .........

See

Digital Subscriber Line Access

Multiplexer

Dynamic DNS..................................1-3, 8-1, 14-2

DYNDNS Wildcard......................................... 8-1

E

ECHO .............................................................. 7-5

Encapsulation..........................1-4, 3-1, 17-5, 18-2

ENET ENCAP............................................. 3-1

PPP over Ethernet........................................ 3-1

PPPoA ......................................................... 3-1

RFC 1483 .................................................... 3-2

Error Log ....................................................... 24-5

Index H-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Error/Information Messages

Sample....................................................... 24-6

Ethernet Traffic............................................ 22-18

F

Factory LAN Defaults ..................................... 5-2

FCC.................................................................... iii

Filename Conventions ................................... 25-1

Filter .............................................................. 16-1

Applying Filters....................................... 22-17

Ethernet traffic......................................... 22-18

Ethernet Traffic ....................................... 22-18

Filter Rules ................................................ 22-6

Filter Structure........................................... 22-4

Generic Filter Rule .................................. 22-12

Remote Node............................................. 18-8

Remote Node Filter ................................... 18-9

Remote Node Filters................................ 22-18

Sample..................................................... 22-16

SUA......................................................... 22-14

TCP/IP Filter Rule..................................... 22-7

Filter Log .............................................. 24-7, 24-8

Filter Rule ...................................................... 22-8

Filter Rule Process......................................... 22-3

Filter Rule Setup ............................................ 22-7

Filter Rules Summary

Sample..................................................... 22-17

Filter Set

Class .......................................................... 22-7

Filter Set Configuration ................................. 22-4

Filtering ................................................ 22-1, 22-7

Filtering Process

Outgoing Packets....................................... 22-2

Finger............................................................... 7-5

Firmware File

Maintenance .............................................. 12-9

Frame Relay..................................................... 1-6

FTP .........................................7-5, 8-1, 10-1, 27-2

Restrictions................................................ 27-2

FTP File Transfer........................................... 25-7

FTP Restrictions ................................... 10-1, 25-4

FTP Server....................................................21-14

Full Rate .......................................................... F-1

G

Gateway..........................................................19-3

Gateway Node ................................................20-4

General Setup .................................................14-1

H

Hidden Menus ................................................13-3

Hop Count ............................................ 18-7, 19-3

Host ..................................................................4-2

Host IDs........................................................... B-1

HTTP................................................................7-5

I

IANA................................................................3-5

IGMP................................................................5-3

IGMP support .................................................18-7

Install UPnP....................................................11-3

Windows Me ..............................................11-3

Windows XP ..............................................11-4

Interactive Applications..................................28-1

Internet access ................................................17-1

Internet Access1-2, 1-5, 1-6, 16-2, 17-1, 17-4, 17-

5

Internet Access Setup .............................A-3, 21-1

Internet Assigned Numbers Authority...

See

IANA

IP Address3-4, 5-3, 7-5, 7-7, 12-6, 16-4, 19-3, 20-

4, 22-9, 24-4, 24-9, 28-3

IP Address Assignment ....................................3-4

ENET ENCAP .............................................3-5

PPPoA or PPPoE..........................................3-5

RFC 1483 .....................................................3-5

IP Addressing .................................................. B-1

IP Alias Setup.................................................17-2

IP Classes ........................................................ B-1

IP Filter.........................................................22-11

Logic Flow ...............................................22-10

IP mask...........................................................22-9

IP Packet.......................................................22-12

H-2 Index

IP Policies ...................................................... 28-5

IP Policy Routing (IPPR)........................1-4, 17-1

Applying an IP Policy................................ 28-5

Ethernet IP Policies.................................... 28-5

Gateway ..................................................... 28-5

IP Pool Setup.................................................. 3-12

IP Protocol ..................................................... 28-4

IP Routing Policy (IPPR)............................... 28-1

Benefits...................................................... 28-1

Cost Savings .............................................. 28-1

Criteria ....................................................... 28-1

Load Sharing.............................................. 28-1

Setup .......................................................... 28-2

IP Static Route ............................................... 19-1

IP Static Route Setup ..................................... 19-2

ISDN ................................................................F-2

L

LAN ......................................................24-2, 24-3

LAN Setup ................................................5-1, 6-1

LAN TCP/IP .................................................... 5-2

Link type ........................................................ 24-2

LLC-based Multiplexing.............................. 18-12

Log and Trace ................................................ 24-6

Log Descriptions............................................. G-1

Log Facility.................................................... 24-7

Logging Option...................................22-9, 22-13

Login.............................................................. 18-4

M

MAC address ................................................. 20-4

Main Menu..................................................... 13-3

Management Information Base (MIB)........... 23-2

MBS ..............................

See

Maximum Burst Size

Media Access Control.................................... 20-1

Message Logging ........................................... 24-5

Metric.............................................6-1, 18-7, 19-3

Multicast .................................................5-3, 18-7

Multiplexing

LLC-based ................................................... 3-2

VC-based ..................................................... 3-2

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Multiplexing ...........................1-4, 3-2, 17-5, 18-2

Multiprotocol Encapsulation............................ 3-2

My WAN Address ......................................... 18-7

N

Nailed-Up Connection .....................................

3-6

NAT........................................3-4, 7-5, 7-6, 22-14

Application .................................................. 7-3

Applying NAT in the SMT Menus............ 21-1

Configuring ............................................... 21-3

Definitions................................................... 7-1

Examples ................................................. 21-11

How NAT Works ........................................ 7-2

Mapping Types............................................ 7-3

Non NAT Friendly Application Programs21-17

Ordering Rules .......................................... 21-6

What NAT does........................................... 7-2

NAT Traversal............................................... 11-1

Network Address Translation ........................ 17-6

Network Address Translation (NAT) ............ 21-1

Network Management .............................. 1-4, 7-6

NNTP............................................................... 7-6

P

Packet

Error .......................................................... 24-2

Received .................................................... 24-3

Transmitted................................................ 24-3

Packet Triggered............................................ 24-7

Packets........................................................... 24-2

PAP................................................................ 18-4

Password..................... 4-1,

13-1

, 13-5, 18-4, 23-2

Ping................................................................ 24-9

Point-to-Point...................................................xxii

Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol................... 7-6 policy-based routing ...................................... 28-1

POP3................................................................ 7-6

Port Numbers................................................... 7-5

PPP Encapsulation ....................................... 18-12

PPP Log ................................................ 24-7, 24-8

PPPoA............................................................ 18-2

Index H-3

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

PPTP ................................................................ 7-6

Precedence ............................................ 28-1, 28-4

Private................................................... 18-7, 19-4

Protocol.......................................................... 22-8

Protocol Filter Rules .................................... 22-14

Q

Quality of Service .......................................... 28-1

R

RAS ...................................................... 24-4, 28-2

Rate

Receiving................................................... 24-2

Transmission ............................................. 24-2

Read Me First .................................................. 2-1

Read Me First ...................................................xix

Related Documentation.....................................xix

Remote DHCP Server.................................... 16-4

Remote Management and NAT ..................... 10-2

Remote Management Limitations......... 10-1, 27-2

Remote Management Setup ........................... 27-1

Remote Node ........................................ 18-1, 24-2

Remote Node Profile ................................. 18-3

Remote Node Setup.......................... 18-1, 18-2

Remote Node Index Number ......................... 24-2

Remote Node Traffic ................................... 22-19

Required fields............................................... 13-3

Restore Configuration.................................... 25-6

RFC-1483 ...................................................... 18-2

RFC-2364 ............................................. 18-2, 18-3

RIP.16-4, 18-7.

See

Routing Information Protocol

Routing Information Protocol.......................... 5-3

Direction...................................................... 5-3

Version ........................................................ 5-3

Routing Policy ............................................... 28-1

S

Sample IP Addresses ..................................... 18-8

Schedule Sets

Duration..................................................... 29-2

SCR......................................

See

Sustain Cell Rate

Server

7-4

, 21-3, 21-4, 21-5, 21-8, 21-9, 21-10, 21-

12, 21-13, 26-5

Service................................................................iv

Service Type....................................................A-3

Services ............................................................7-5 setup a schedule..............................................29-2

SMT Menu Overview.....................................13-2

SMTP ...............................................................7-5

SNMP ...............................................................7-6

Community.................................................23-3

Configuration .............................................23-2

Get..............................................................23-2

Manager .....................................................23-2

MIBs ..........................................................23-2

Trap ............................................................23-2

Trusted Host...............................................23-3

Source-Based Routing ....................................28-1

Splitters............................................................ F-1

Static Route Setup ..........................................19-1

Static Routing Topology.................................19-1

SUA................................................... 1-6, 7-5, 7-6

SUA (Single User Account) ...

See

NAT.

See

NAT

Subnet Mask ........ 3-4, 5-3, 16-4, 18-6, 19-3, 24-4

Subnet Masks .................................................. B-2

Subnetting........................................................ B-2

Supporting Disk................................................xix

Syntax Conventions........................................... xx

Syslog .............................................................24-6

Syslog IP Address ..........................................24-7

Syslog Server..................................................24-6

System

Console Port Speed ....................................24-5

Diagnostic ..................................................24-8

Log and Trace ............................................24-5

Syslog and Accounting ..............................24-6

System Information....................................24-3

System Status .............................................24-1

System Information ........................................24-3

System Information & Diagnosis ...................24-1

System Maintenance....24-1, 24-3, 25-2, 25-4, 25-

10, 26-1, 26-2, 26-4, 26-5

H-4 Index

System Management Terminal ...................... 13-3

System Status ................................................. 24-2

System Timeout ....................................10-2, 27-3

T

TCP/IP .......................................10-2, 22-14, 24-9

Telephone Microfilters.....................................F-1

Telnet ............................................................. 10-2

Telnet Configuration ...................................... 10-2

TFTP

And FTP Over WAN} ............................... 27-2

Restrictions ................................................ 27-2

TFTP and FTP over WAN Will Not Work

When…...................................................... 25-4

TFTP and FTP Over WAN} .......................... 10-1

TFTP File Transfer......................................... 25-9

TFTP Restrictions .................................10-1, 25-4

Time and Date Setting...........................26-4, 26-5

Time Zone...................................................... 26-5

Timeout.......................................................... 15-2

TOS (Type of Service)................................... 28-1

Trace Records ................................................ 24-5

Traffic Redirect.........................................6-7, 6-8

Setup .......................................................... 15-2

Transmission Rates .......................................... 1-2

Type of Service

....................

28-1

, 28-3, 28-4, 28-5

U

Universal Plug and Play................................. 11-1

Application ................................................ 11-1

Prestige 660R ADSL 2+ Access Gateway

Security issues ........................................... 11-1

Universal Plug and Play Forum ..................... 11-2

UNIX Syslog ........................................ 24-5, 24-6

UNIX syslog parameters................................ 24-6

Upload Firmware ........................................... 25-7

UPnP.........................

See

Universal Plug and Play

User Name ....................................................... 8-2

V

VC-based Multiplexing ................................. 18-2

VPI & VCI....................................................... 3-2

W

WAN Setup.................................................... 15-1

Web Configurator ..............................2-1, 2-2, 2-3

Wizard Setup ................................................... 3-1

X

XMODEM protocol....................................... 25-2

Z

ZyNOS.................................................. 25-1, 25-2

ZyNOS F/W Version ..................................... 25-1

ZyXEL Limited Warranty

Note ................................................................iv

Index H-5

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

advertisement

Table of contents